Home

Stratix 5700 Ethernet Managed Switches User Manual, 1783

1. Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 69 Chapter 2 70 Switch Installation 5 Connect a Category 5 Ethernet cable not provided from the flashing switch port to the Ethernet port on a computer If you wait too long to connect the cable che Setup status indicator turns off or For 1783 BMS4S2SGL or 1783 BMS4S2SGA switches do one of the following e Insert a copper SFP module into port Gil 1 and then connect a Category 5 Ethernet cable from the SFP module to the Ethernet port ona computcr e Use a fiber to Ethernet media converter to connect port Gil 1 to the Ethernet port on a computer IMPORTANT Port Gi1 1 does not flash during setup but must be used to connect 1783 BMS4S2SGL or 1783 BMS4S2SGA switches to a computer Start an Internet browser session on the computer and navigate to http 169 254 0 1 If you have a home page configured the switch configuration loads instead of your normal home page The switch prompts you for the default switch user name and password 7 Leave the user name blank and enter the default switch password switch IMPORTANT In some scenarios the switch requires you to enter the switch password multiple times before it accepts the password 8 Ifthe Express Setup window does not appear do the following e Enter the URL of a well known website in your browser to be sure the browser is working correctly Your bro
2. aaceccaceceaceee aea e ee 119 Front Panel and Status IndicatOfS YY uu 119 Switch Information L L FFY LY YY uu 122 SwitchbTealth ue Gu Si O YR o 123 Port Uri zatuon ossa Y eeu URDDO 124 Connctre Smart ports ab bub cones ON GN O NG Ni 125 Customize Port Role Attributes LL Y Yu uu 126 Manage Custom Smartport Macros cccc Y eu 127 Conficure Port eL nose lass GO OODD dU 006 64 132 Configure Port Thresholds aes Ge AR a aY yn RO 134 Configure Etnor Cnanne ua dd CGA OU 125 Contisure DACP uyd O yo DYU DO dd God MA CYD 137 Seupdtno DEIO Server ui yda GI ON odd Non ER 137 Configure a DHCP IP Address Pool au RY Cd aw 138 Reserve IP Addresses through DHCP Persistenc 139 Con eur VLAN See du di Od YD Oad 141 Assien POEN LAN Serier rinra O tae FAM 142 Configure Power over Ethernet PoE POrts 142 Configure PTP Time Synchronization eidaw Gw CY 145 Enable and Configure Routing aa Y Cd GUDD 148 Enable Connected Routing Only su Y We AO wu 148 Enable Both Static and Connected Routing 148 Connor S Pin ju Geo AE 0125922248154445 3404 149 Global a Y o e OO ARRA 149 DOE At Settings oe A DY A OER 150 Conticurc RED 264205 O Rd A UG 3000040062 C Go 151 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 7 Table of Contents Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Con neur NAT a GA E Y DRDD Create NAT I
3. 32294 M 5 Grasp the SFP module between your thumb and index finger and carefully remove it from the module slot 6 Place the removed SFP module in an antistatic bag or other protective environment 48 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 Wire the External Alarms The switch has two alarm input and one Form C single pole double throw alarm output relay circuits for external alarms The input alarm relay circuits are designed to sense if the alarm input is open or closed relative to the alarm input reference pin The output alarm relay circuit has a single Form C relay with one normally open NO and one normally closed NC contact You can configure the output alarm relay as either normally energized or normally de energized by using the CLI Refer to Appendix C for an alarm wiring example Alarm signals are connected to the switch through the 6 way alarm relay connector Three connections are dedicated to the two alarm input circuits e Alarm input I IN1 e Alarm input 2 IN2 e Isolated reference ground An alarm input and the reference ground wiring connection are required to complete a single input alarm circuit You must provide either an NO or an NC dry contact to complete the alarm circuit between reference ground and IN1 or IN2 ATTENTION Do not apply an external voltage source to either the IN1 or IN2 alarm inputs Limit alarm output wiring to 48
4. _ aI NI YN CN 98 EtherChannels RD GWN GCR Y WN CU GDG OA 98 DPHOP Persistence nu A ET EOE Y i GAU 100 CIP Sync Time Synchronization Precision Time Protocol 100 Network Address Translation NAT Y Y Y Lu uu 101 Conicari don Overview cw a GA Co 4388 aaa 101 VEAN SASSIGHIMGN S irese a ae Ae n EEA 105 Configuration Considerations cs sra raoe 0950484390999454 300816 106 TraficPermits and EIWpsie se 5003442002221204 et 106 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Table of Contents Resilient Ethernet Protocol LL FFY Y uu 107 KEP Open SCOMent aaa e BD O yD DY anaes 108 REP AIG Segment F O 4222 109 Access Ring opoloo i uu dd YY dwg 109 Link Iate oE TF NC TOR FEW HY 110 SNMP eane naor 3 dr D 2 1229008 RI cena sabes 111 Supported MIBS scot coud Seen UR Y and levee OO GR A 112 PORE a o LL tlhe Y HANNA A 1A G IN 113 ROUMNG ee i RE Y GDC GR NG YG RA dU seas 113 Configuration Management y a ewes 114 SID Card Synchronization an GN EY wed eae 114 ETE CF RYG RW NN NN 114 Cryptographic IOS Software optional YY Yl eee 114 Cable DOGOS E 2a Yd NY Tai Fo 115 Advanced Software Features aao aaa aaa 115 Chapter 4 Access the Device Manager Web Interface 118 DashboardOvervieW
5. Table 33 PoE Tab Fields Field Description Port Displays the port number Mode Displays the Power Management mode of the port e Auto Enables the detection of powered devices and automatically allocates power to the PoE port if a device is connected This setting is selected by default To limit the power used by this port adjust the value Power Limit field e Static Reserves power for this port even when no device is connected to make sure that power is provided upon device detection You can also choose Static mode to prioritize a port The switch allocates power to Static mode ports before it allocates power to Auto mode ports e Off PoE is disabled For more information see Power Management Modes on page 87 Status Displays the current status of the port e 0 The status is unknown e 1 PoEis enabled Power is supplied to the port with no errors e 2 PoE is not enabled Power is not supplied to the port e 3 PoEis enabled but the switch denied power to the port e 4 PoE is enabled but a system fault occurred while power was supplied to the port e 5 PoE is enabled but the port overdrew power Power Limit W Displays the maximum amount of power available to the port PoE ports 4 15 4 W PoE ports 4 30 W If the port is in Auto mode you can enter a value The default value is 15 4 W Power Used W Displays the amount of power currently in use by the port If the port is in Auto mode the default valu
6. B C eee D Prr The information on this tab is not displayed if you are offline Table 39 Cable Diagnostics Port Dialog Box Fields Field Port Test last run on Pair Status Distance to Break Diagnose Cable Description The port selected for configuration The port number includes the port type Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet and the specific port number EXAMPLE Gi1 1 is Gigabit Ethernet port 1 The time the test was last executed The date time format is mm dd yy hh mm ss tt If the test has never been run the time and all distance and status information is blank Each pair pair of cables in the network individually listed If pair does not exist or test has never been run this is blank Specifies the link state the last time the test was executed If pair does not exist or test has never run status is blank For distance if the pair is Normal status No Break Detected is shown No distance is displayed The distance to the break from the switch for each estimated pair with a plus or minus error value individually listed A value is displayed only when the status of an existing pair is not Normal This is blank if the test was never run before If a pair does not exist appears Click to run the Diagnose Cable test A connection interruption warning appears e Ifyou are sure you want to continue with the test click Yes Be prepared to enter a valid password to run the test
7. Discards Out Excessive Collisions Errors In MAC emit Errors Errors Out MAC Recy Errors Error Rate Carrier Sense Unknown Protos Ir Frame Too Long Table 38 Port Diagnostics Dialog Box Fields Field Description Port The port selected for configuration The port number includes the port type Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet and the specific port number EXAMPLE Gi1 1 is Gigabit Ethernet port 1 Interface Counters These counters let you view status of octets received and sent and packets received and sent e Octets In The number of octets received by the port e Octets Out The number of octets sent by the port e Ucast Packets In The number of unicast packets received by the port Ucast Packets Out The number of unicast packets sent by the port e NUcast packets In The number of multicast packets received by the port e NUcast packets Out The number of multicast packets sent by the port Discards In The number of inbound packets that have been discarded Discards Out The number of outbound packets that have been discarded e Errors In The number of inbound packets that contain errors e Errors Out The number of outbound packets that contain errors e Unknown Protos Protocols In The number of inbound packets with unknown protocols Media Counters These counters let you view the number of collisions on a link Single The number of single
8. e Ifyou do not want to run the test click No or close the window IMPORTANT To run a valid test on gigabit ports you must first configure the gigabit port as an RJ45 media type in the Device Manager Web interface as described in Configure Port Settings on page 132 IMPORTANT This test can interrupt connections to the module and to any other modules connected through this module Also the connection between workstation and controller can be interrupted You must have the correct privilege to run this test Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 209 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment DHCP Pool Display You can view DHCP address pool information for the switch from the DHCP Pool Display tab You can view 0 15 pools This information is gathered directly from the switch Each row represents a single instance and instance values cannot be consecutive Port Configuration Smartports amp VLANs Port Thresholds Port Security Port Status DHCP Pool Display DHCP Address Assignment SD Flash Sync Save Riestore a i Enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Pool Nam Starting IP Ending IP Delete Edit Pool ON NAME Address Address Pool Properties one 10 868 64 208 10 686 84 208 New Pool Status Running TIP The information on this tab is not displayed if you are offline Table 40 DHCP Pool Dislay Tab Fields Field Description Enable Dynami
9. 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 16 Type a unique starting public address to represent the devices This address must correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Starting Public Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 0 or 10 200 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 32 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 16 From the pull down menus choose the subnet mask for the addresses to translate Valid values e Class B 255 255 0 0 e Class C 255 255 255 0 e Portion of Class C 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 provides 128 addresses per translation entry provides 64 addresses per translation entry provides 32 addresses per translation entry provides 16 addresses per translation entry DDO nao Displays the range of existing addresses for devices on the priva
10. Incoming IGMP Traffic Blocked Outgoing IGMP Traffic Blocked Private to Public Translations Public to Private Translations Refresh Communication 230 The NAT Diagnostics dialog box displays diagnostics for the selected instance MAT Diagnostics Table Current Active Translations 0 Translations Total WAT Translated Packets Packets Total Private To Public Address Translations 2 Translations Total Public To Private Address Translations 2 Translations Total Translations 4 Translations ARP Fixup Packets ICMP Fixup Packets Total Fixups Packets Blocked Mon Translated Traffic Packets Pass Through Mon Translated Traffic Packets Blocked Multicast Traffic Packets Pass Through Multicast Traffic Packets Blocked IGMP Traffic Packets Pass Through IGMP Traffic Packets Private To Public Translations Public To Private Translations Clear Diagnostics Refresh Communication Help Description Displays the number of translations that have occurred within the last 90 seconds across all NAT instances Displays the total number of packets that have been translated for this instance Displays the total number of private to public translations for this instance Displays the total number of public to private translations for this instance Displays the number of ARP packets that have been fixed up for this instance Displays the number of ICMP packets that have been fixed up for thi
11. 10 200 1 0 or 10 200 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 32 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 223 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Field Description Subnet Mask From the pull down menus choose the subnet mask for the addresses to translate Valid values e Class B 255 255 0 0 e Class C 255 255 255 0 e Portion of Class C 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 provides 128 addresses per translation entry provides 64 addresses per translation entry provides 32 addresses per translation entry provides 16 addresses per translation entry DDO PES PES Effective Private Displays the range of existing addresses for devices on the private subnet that are Addresses configured for translation If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid Effective Public Displays the range of unique public addresses to represent the devices Addresses If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid 6 Click OK 7 Click the Public to Private tab nc vence QU E 4
12. Effective Private Addresses Displays the range of existing addresses for devices on the private subnet that are configured for translation If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid Effective Public Addresses Displays the range of unique public addresses to represent the devices If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid 218 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 e Io translate all of the addresses in the private subnet or a portion of the private subnet complete the fields below Field Type of Entry Starting Private IP Address Starting Public IP Address Subnet Mask Effective Private Addresses Effective Public Addresses Description Choose Subnet Type the existing starting address for a device on the private subnet This address must correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Starting Private Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 or 192 168 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 32
13. Fa1 8 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Fa1 1 Fal 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 Fa1 1 Fal 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 Chapter 3 77 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Table 3 Port Numbering continued Cat No Port Numbering on Switch Labels Port Numbering in config text File 1783 BMS10CGN 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed Fa1 1 switch full firmware NAT Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 Fa1 1 Fal 2 Fa1 3 Fal 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 Fa1 1 Fal 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Fa1 11 Fa1 12 Fa1 13 Fa1 14 Fa1 15 Fa1 16 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 NJ CON DW ON BW NJ 1783 BMS10CGP 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware PTP NJ CON WD UM BW NJ 1783 BMS12T4E2CGNK 18 port 12 Ethernet ports 4 PoE PoE ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware NAT conformal coating OO N CG UI BW NJ 78 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Table 3 Port Numbering continued Cat No Port Numbering on Switch Labels Port Numbering in config text File 1783 BMS12T4E2CGP 18 port 12 Ethernet ports 4 PoE PoE ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware Fa1 1 Fal 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Fa1 11 Fal 12 Fa1
14. and the console device Table 49 Pinouts with DB 9 Pin Switch Console Port DTE RJ45 to DB 9 Terminal Adapter Console Device Signal Signal 280 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Cables and Connectors Appendix C The following table lists the pinouts for the console port RJ45 to DB 25 female DTE adapter and the console device The RJ45 to DB 25 female DTE adapter is not supplied with the switch Table 50 Pinouts with DB 25 Pin Switch Console Port DTE Console Device Signal Signal Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 281 AppendixC Cables and Connectors Notes 282 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 1783 UM004D EN P March 2014 1783 UM004C EN P December 2013 Appendix D History of Changes Topic Page 1783 UM004D EN P March 2014 283 1783 UM004C EN P December 2013 283 1783 UM004B EN P June 2013 285 This appendix summarizes the revisions to this manual Reference this appendix if you need information to determine what changes have been made across multiple revisions This can be especially useful if you are deciding to upgrade your hardware or software based on information added with previous revisions of this manual Change Updated Device Manager hardware and software requirements New Express Setup window New process for enabling routing New DeviceManager Web interface Change Access product release notes Descript
15. full firmware PTP 18 port 12 Ethernet ports 4 PoE PoE ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch lite firmware 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo ports managed switch lite firmware 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo ports managed switch full firmware 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch lite firmware 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware NAT 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware PTP 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware PTP conformal coating 8 port 8 Ethernet ports managed switch full firmware 16 port 16 Ethernet ports managed switch full firmware 24 port 24 Ethernet ports managed switch full firmware 10 port 4 Ethernet ports 4 PoE PoE ports 2 Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware Precision Time Protocol PTP 18 port 8 Ethernet ports 8 PoE PoE ports 2 Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware PTP 100BASE FX multi mode fiber transceiver 1000BASE SX multi mode fiber transceiver 100BASE LX single mode fiber transceiver 1000BASE LX single mode fiber transceiver Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Catalog Number Description Power Supply 1606 XL series recommended Class 2 24V DC output power supplies 1606 XLP series recommended or
16. management interface 105 traffic permits and fixups 106 161 228 translation entry types 104 network address translation See NAT noise electrical 32 58 0 Overview tab dashboard 171 P parent clock 145 pinouts crossover cables four twisted pair 1000BASE T ports 276 PoE 274 RJ45 to DB 25 terminal adapter 281 RJ45 to DB 9 terminal adapter 280 straight through cables two twisted pair 275 PoE configure via Device Manager Web interface 142 configure via Studio 5000 environment 201 features 85 89 initial power allocation 86 pinouts 274 power management modes 87 powered device detection 86 wire DC power source 45 pool name 141 pop up blockers 26 238 port assignments for CIP data 271 configuration 200 connection procedures 66 diagnostics 208 dual purpose 56 numbering 133 roles 125 security 97 162 206 status 207 threshold 134 thresholds 205 type 152 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Index port settings auto MDIX 133 description 133 descriptions of 132 Duplex mode 133 enable disable 133 default 133 speed 133 default 133 POST description 35 60 results 35 60 power 35 60 connecting to DC 40 DC power 64 power and relay connector connecting to the switch 43 52 power classifications 86 Precision Time Protocol 164 See also PIP 145 prevent electrostatic discharge 36 57 proxy settings 26 238 PTP 164 Boundary mode 145 timing message settin
17. sd T al T LL Fate al E wi E Ml E he Fair C mi E wi E Hall Fats al O al E sll O 5 Refresh Communication Set Table 35 Port Threshold Tab Fields Field Description Port The port selected for configuration The port number includes the port type Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet Incoming Threshold Settings Outgoing Threshold Settings and the specific port number EXAMPLE Gi1 1 is Gigabit Ethernet port 1 Enable incoming thresholds and set the threshold values for the unicast multicast and broadcast traffic for each port Valid values for units e Packets per second pps e Percentage of total bandwidth e Bits per second bps Enable outgoing thresholds and set the threshold values for the traffic for each port Units Percentage of total bandwidth Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 205 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Port Secu rity The Port Security feature applies only to Full firmware For more information see Port Security on page 97 General Connection Module Info Fault Pragram Action Switch Configuration Switch Status Port Configuration Smartports amp VLANz Port Thresholds Port Security P 4 Port MAC Addresses Allowed Dynamic Static Gil C i 83 Giz 0 0 Fat 0 0 Fa1 2 2 1 1 Fa13 0 0 0 Fal 4 C 0 0 Fas C 0 0 Fal 6
18. 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 32 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 16 226 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Field Subnet Mask Effective Public Addresses Effective Private Addresses 10 Click OK Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 Description From the pull down menus choose the subnet mask for the addresses to translate Valid values e Class B 255 255 0 0 e Class C 255 255 255 0 e Portion of Class C 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 provides 128 addresses per translation entry provides 64 addresses per translation entry provides 32 addresses per translation entry provides 16 addresses per translation entry DDO nano Displays the range of existing addresses for devices on the public subnet that are configured for translation If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid Displays the range of unique private addresses to represent the devices If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid 11 Optional To configure traffic permits and packet fixups proceed to Configure Traffic Permits and Fixups on page 228 12 Click Set Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 227 Chapter5 Manage the Switch vi
19. 113 Apply this role to ports if you do not want a specialized Smartport role on the port This role can be used on connections to any device including devices in the roles described above Custom Smartport roles You can create a customized port role with a user defined name Refer to Chapter 4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface for more information on creating custom Smartport roles Avoid Smartport Mismatches A Smartport mismatch occurs when an attached device does not match the Smartport role applied to the switch port Mismatches can have adverse effects on devices and your network Mismatches can result in the following conditions e Affect the behavior of the attached device e Lower network performance reduce the level of quality of service QoS on CIP voice wireless switch and router traffic e Reduce restrictions on guest access to the network e Reduce protection from denial of service DoS attacks on the network e Disable or shut down the port We recommend that you always verify which Smartport role is applied to a port before attaching a device to the port or reconnecting devices Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Power over Ethernet PoE Switches with PoE ports are software configurable and provide these features e Support for IEEE 802 3af PoE compliant devices e Support for IEEE 802 3at Type 2 PoE which increases th
20. 3 DisablePort 4 DisablePort 5 DisablePort 6 DisablePort 7 DisablePort 8 DisablePort 9 DisablePort 10 Default Display Style Valid Values Decimal LinkStatus 0 Decimal LinkStatus 1 Decimal LinkStatus 2 Decimal LinkStatus 3 Decimal LinkStatus 4 Decimal LinkStatus 5 Decimal LinkStatus 6 Decimal LinkStatus 7 Decimal LinkStatus 8 Decimal LinkStatus 9 Decimal LinkStatus 10 Decimal LinkStatus 11 Decimal LinkStatus 12 Decimal LinkStatus 13 Decimal LinkStatus 14 Decimal LinkStatus 15 Decimal LinkStatus 16 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 0 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 1 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 2 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 3 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 4 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 5 Module defined Data Types Appendix A AB STRATIX_5700_16PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Type PortFa1_6UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 7UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_8UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_9UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 10UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFal_11UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 12UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 13UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 14UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 15UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 16UnauthorizedDevice BOOL AnyPortThreshold BOOL PortFa1_ Threshold BOOL PortFa1_2Threshold BOOL PortFa1_3Threshold BOOL PortFa1_4Threshold BOOL PortFa1_5Threshold BOOL PortFa1_6Threshold BOOL PortFa1_7Threshold BOOL PortFa1_8Threshold BOOL PortFa1_9Threshold BOOL PortFa1_ 10Threshold BOOL PortFa1_11Threshold BOOL
21. 6 8 mm 0 27 in of insulation from the wires Stripping more than the recommended amount of wire can leave exposed wire from the alarm relay connector after installation 4 Insert the exposed wires for the external alarm device into the connections based on an alarm input or output circuit setup See Table 1 on page 50 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 5 Use a ratcheting torgue flathead screwdriver to torgue the alarm relay connector captive screw above the installed wire leads to 0 23 Nem 2 0 lbein Do not exceed the recommended torgue IN1 External Device Connection 1 L REF External Device Connection 2 32288 M 6 Repeat the above procedure to insert the input and output wires of one additional external alarm device into the alarm relay connector The following figure shows the completed wiring for two external alarm devices The first alarm device circuit is wired as an alarm relay input circuit the IN1 and REF connections complete the circuit The second alarm device circuit is wired as an alarm relay output circuit by using the normally open side of the form C relay contacts The NO and COM connections complete the circuit REF External Device Connection 2 COM Wired Connection IN1 External Device Connection 1 NO Wired Connection 32289 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 51 Chapter2 S
22. 9 24 Native VLAN _ management 500 v Configure Power over PoE and PoE features are supported on switches with PoE ports when a correct power supply is connected to the switch For power supply requirements see Ethernet PoE Ports You can do the following from the PoE window e Limit the total power supported e Configure mode and power settings for individual ports For most applications the default configuration Auto mode is sufficient and no further configuration is reguired However you can customize the settings to meet your needs For example to give a PoE port higher power priority set the mode to Static and allocate the power to be used As another example to disallow 142 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 high power devices on a port set the mode to Auto and specify a maximum power limit IMPORTANT When you make PoE configuration changes to a port the port drops power Whether the port powers up again depends on the new configuration the state of the other PoE ports and the state of the power budget For example if port 1 is in Auto mode and the On state and you configure it for Static mode the switch removes power from port 1 detects the powered device and repowers the port If port 1 is in Auto mode and the On state and you configure it with a maximum wattage of 10 W the switch removes power from the po
23. 93 definition 93 features 164 Initial Setup mode 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 installation attach the power and relay connector 43 52 DIN rail 37 grounding procedures 38 40 62 63 mount ArmorStratix switch 61 POST 35 60 pre installation information and guidelines 32 58 required clearance 31 58 verify switch operation 34 60 verifying switch operation 35 60 wiring the relays 49 51 65 IP address customization DHCP IP address pool 138 139 switch port 141 customization connected devices 137 customization switch port 139 DHCP IP address pool ending range 139 Starting range 138 Express Setup 142 switch port 141 assigning 141 deleting 141 modifying 141 translation 101 troubleshoot 235 DHCP 235 wrong IP address 235 L lease length 139 link integrity verify with REP 110 Logix Designer application 11 187 M management interface 26 NAT 105 management VLAN 90 memory 57 67 MIBs supported 112 mismatch prevention Smartport roles 84 modes management Direct Managed 237 Initial Setup 178 module information 196 module properties 192 module defined data types 244 monitoring alert log 177 network analyzer 113 port mirroring 113 multicast storm 95 NAT configuration considerations 106 configuration overview 101 configure via Device Manager Web interface 153 162 configure via Logix Designer application 215 228 definition 101 diagnostics 172 229 232
24. AP CO N O Uu A WN gt 12345678 PoE ports integrate power and data signals on the same wires The ports use standard RJ45 connectors and Ethernet pinouts with internal crossovers Figure 12 10 100 PoE Connector Pinouts and Power Sourcing Equipment PSE Voltage Pin Label RD RD TD NC NC TD NC NC CON Oo Uu A WN Alternative A MDI 12345678 Positive V PSE Positive V PSE Negative V PSE Negative V PSE Connect to 10BASE T and 100BASE TX Compatible Devices The auto MDIX feature is enabled by default Follow the cabling guidelines below when the auto MDIX feature has been disabled When connecting the ports to LOBASE T and 100BASE TX compatible devices such as servers workstations and routers you can use a two or four twisted pair straight through cable wired for I0BASE T and 100BASE TX To identify a crossover cable compare the two modular ends of the cable Hold the cable ends side by side with the tab at the back The wire connected to the pin on the outside of the left plug must be a different color from the wire connected to the pin on the inside of the right plug The following figures show these schematics e Two twisted pair straight through cable e Four twisted pair straight through cable 274 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Cables and Connectors Appendix C Figure 13 Two Twisted pair Straight through Cable Schematic Switch Router or Perso
25. B C D dangereux et non dangereux with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature Chaque produit est livr avec des marquages sur sa plaque d identification qui indiquent code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code le code de temp rature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits lowest T number may be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the sont combin s dans un syst me le code de temp rature le plus d favorable code de system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the temp rature le plus faible peut tre utilis pour d terminer le code de temp rature local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation global du syst me Les combinaisons d quipements dans le syst me sont sujettes a 30 inspection par les autorit s locales gualifi es au moment de l installation WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD e Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous WARNING RISQUE D EXPLOSION e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de d brancher l quipement e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de d brancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes reli s a cet quipement a l aide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs
26. Backplane CompactLogix System fa 1769 L32E CLX_Ethernet_controller 26 3 Right click the Ethernet port you created and choose New Module 3 8 1 0 Configuration E Backplane CompactLogix System E fa 1769 L32E CLX_Ethernet_controller N d 769 L32E Ether New Module Cross Reference Ctrl E Properties Alt Enter zz 4 Click Communications Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 191 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment 5 Click the sign and scroll down until you see the switch you want to configure If you do not see the switch on the list you can obtain the AOP from the Rockwell Automation support website a Go to http www rockwellautomation com support b Click Downloads RSLogix 5000 I O Modules Add on Profiles c Choose the 1783 Stratix 5700 Managed Switches Add on Profile 6 Click OK to display the Module Properties dialog box Configure General Properties General Connection Module Info Fault Program Action Switch Configuration Switch Status Port Configuration Smartports amp VLANs Port Thresholds Port Security PL Type 1783 BMS10CGP Strate 5700 10 Port Managed Switch Gigabit Uplinks Full Pw PTP Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Line_1_EN2T Ethemet Address Hame Stratix5 00 10CGRF 9 Private Network 192 1661 10 Description O IP Address Host Name Module Detinition Series Revision 11 Electronic Keying
27. Chapter 2 Power supply reguirements depend on your application Application Power Supply per Port Allen Bradley Products PoE only 44 57V DC 48V DC nom 15 4W max Switched mode power supplies IEEE 802 3af e 1606 XL Standard e 1606 XLE Essential PoE and PoE 50 57V DC 54V DC nom 15 4 W max for PoE e 1606 XLP Compact IEEE 802 3at Type 2 30 W max for PoE 1606 XLS Performance WARNING Before performing any of the following procedures make sure that power is removed from the DC circuit or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding 1 Measure a length of 0 82 0 52 mm 18 20 AWG copper wire long enough to connect to the DC power source 2 Using an 18 gauge wire stripping tool strip each of the two wires to 6 3mm 0 25 in 0 5 mm 0 02 in Do not strip more than 6 8 mm 0 27 in of insulation from the wire Stripping more than the recommended amount of wire can leave wire exposed after installation 6 3 mm 0 25 in 0 5 mm 0 02 in 31789 M 3 Locate the power connector 4 Insert the exposed part of the positive wire into the DC connection and the exposed part of the return wire into the DC connection Make sure that you cannot see any wire lead Only wire with insulation can extend from the connector 5 Use a ratcheting torgue screwdriver to torgue the power connector captive screws above the installed wire leads to 0 23 Nem 2 0 lbein 6 Connect the other end of t
28. Chapter 2 When you first set up the switch use Express Setup to enter the initial IP address Doing this enables the switch to be used as a managed switch You can then access the switch through the IP address for additional configuration IMPORTANT Do not run Express Setup with an SD card inserted in the switch You need this equipment to set up the switch e Acomputer with Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 2003 or Windows Vista operating system installed A supported web browser Internet Explorer 9 0 10 0 and 11 0 or Firefox 25 26 with JavaScript enabled A straight through or crossover Category 5 Ethernet cable to connect a computer to the switch or For ArmorStratix 5700 switches an M12 to RJ45 patchcord such as Allen Bradley catalog number 1585D M4TBJM 2 to connect a computer to the switch For 1783 BMS4S2SGL or 1783 BMS4S2SGA switches A Gigabit copper SFP module such as Cisco model number GLC T or A Gigabit fiber to Ethernet media converter Do the following to configure your computer Disable any wireless interface running on your personal computer Disable other networks in your system Set your computer to automatically determine its IP address DHCP versus statically configured Disable any static DNS servers Disable browser proxy settings Typically browser settings are in Tools gt Internet Options gt Connections gt LAN Settings Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 U
29. Choose a Smartport role from the pull down menu in the Role column 4 Click Save Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 125 Chapter 4 126 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Customize Port Role Attributes Each switch port is a member of a VLAN Devices attached to switch ports that belong to the same VLAN share the same data broadcasts and system resources Depending on your network reguirements it can be sufficient to assign all ports to the default VLAN which is named default One VLAN can be sufficient for a small network Before changing virtual local area network VLAN memberships understand what a VLAN is its purpose and how to create a VLAN See page 90 for more information about VLANs Assign a Port to a VLAN VLAN memberships Each switch port is a member of a VLAN Devices attached to switch ports that belong to the same VLAN share the same data broadcasts and system resources Communication between VLANs requires a Layer 3 device such as a router or a Layer 3 switch Depending on your network reguirements it can be sufficient to assign all ports to the default VLAN which is named default If additional VLANs have been created you must decide which ports are best suited to which VLANs To change a VLAN assignment follow these steps 1 From the Configure menu choose Smartports 2 Check the checkbox next to the port for which to change the VLAN 3 Cli
30. Compatible Module Connection Input Data 192 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 To configure general properties follow these steps 1 From the Module Properties dialog box complete the fields described below Field Description Name A name you choose for the switch Description A description that helps you remember something important about the switch Ethernet Address Choose one of the following e Private Network The private network on which the switch resides e P Address The IP address you entered when you performed the Express Setup The controller uses the IP address to communicate e Host Name The host name provided on initial configuration when you performed the Express Setup The host name requires that you have a DNS server configured on the network for the controller s Ethernet interface module IMPORTANT Be sure that the IP address and host name are the same as those provided when you performed Express Setup Click OK Go online with the switch by choosing Communications gt Go online Double click the switch to view the Module Properties dialog box Click Change VY 3 794 S Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 193 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Field Revision Electronic Keying Connection Data Connection Password 194 6 Complete the fields
31. Configure menu choose Smartports 2 Click the Custom Smartports tab 3 Click Import Network Smartports Smartport Role Custom Smartports Custom Smartport Macros Add f Edit Delete ff Export C Name Icon Test C510 4 Click Browse Import Custom Smartport Macro Select Macro Definition file Import Macros Status Status Description No data available 5 Select the macro file on your computer or network drive The file must be an appropriately formatted xml file 6 Click Import Macros 7 Click OK 130 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Export a Custom Smartports Macro You must use Firefox 3 6 or higher to export a custom Smartports macro 1 From the Configure menu choose Smartports 2 Click the Custom Smartports tab 3 Check the checkbox next to the macro to export 4 Click Export o Network Smartports Smartport Role Custom Smartport Macros amp Add f Edit ME Delete f Import C Name Icon a Test C510 5 Save the resulting file Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 131 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Configure Port Settings The basic port settings determine how data is received and sent between the switch and the attached device You can change these settings to fit your network needs and to troubl
32. Fa1 16 Fa1 16 IG Fa1 17 Fa1 17 Fa1 17 UU H Fa1 18 Fa1 18 Fa1 18 di Gi1 1 Fa1 19 Gi1 1 Fa1 19 Gi1 2 Fa1 20 Gi1 2 Fa1 20 6 port 6 port Gb 8 port Switch Switch Switch Any All ports Any All ports Any All ports Fa1 1 Fa1 1 Fa1 2 Fa1 2 Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 3 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 4 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Gi1 1 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Gi1 2 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Fa1 21 Fa1 22 Fa1 23 a tl TH SVI1 SVI1 SVI1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 271 Appendix B Port Assignments for CIP Data Notes 272 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Appendix C Cables and Connectors Topic Page 10 100 and 10 100 1000 Ports 273 Dual purpose Ports combo ports 276 Console Ports 277 Alarm Ports 279 Cable and Adapter Specifications 280 Adapter Pinouts 280 For recommended cables refer to the Stratix Ethernet Device Specifications Technical Data publication 1783 T D001 10 100 and 10 100 1000 The 10 100 and 10 100 1000 Ethernet ports on switches use standard RJ45 Ports connectors and Ethernet pinouts with internal crossovers TIP The auto MDIX feature is enabled by default Figure 10 10 100 Connector Pinouts Pin Label 12345678 RD RD TD NC NC TD NC NC CON Oo Uu A WN gt Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 273 AppendixC Cables and Connectors Figure 11 10 100 1000 Connector Pinouts Pin Label TPO TPO Tris TP2 TP2 1P1 TP3
33. Fixups a caca eee 228 View Address Translations in RSLinx Software 229 NA TD GOLLI Y dd en A ARA CD S T 229 Private to Public Translation Diagnostics 231 Public to Private Translation Diagnostics 232 SD Elash ync 42 29058 YU a Ad YU Dd 233 Save and Restore the Switch Configuration 234 Chapter 6 Veri Doo eat enti i AG En E AO 235 1D Address SSUES gae GG A GG 3800 DU NG d wd i GR O Co NG 235 Device Manager Web Interface Issues 0 002 cece ee ee ee eee 236 Switch Perrorimancesdcscc ugar eabinadadse seins GG 237 Access Direct Managed Modewahs isa A aw dh UU 237 Restart or Reset the Switch LL FFY YY YY uu 239 Restart the Switch from the Device Manager Web Interface 239 Restart the Switch from the Logix Designer Application 239 Reset the Switch to Factory Defaults 240 Recover the Switch Firmware and Restore Factory Defaults 240 Troubleshoot a Firmware Upgrade 0 0c cece cece eee Y Yd 241 Appendix A Module defined Input Data Type 6 port Gb switches 245 Module defined Output Data Type 6 port Gb switches 246 Module defined Input Data Type G portswitches 246 Module defined Output Data Type 6 port switches 247 Module defined Input Data Type 8 portswitches 247 Module defined Output Data Type 8 p
34. General Public to Private Advanced Public to Private NAT Table Provide Public subnet devices unique IP addresses on the Private subnet 10 0 0 192 192 168 1 192 10 0 0 100 192 168 1 100 m Refresh Communication e 224 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 8 Click New Entry to display the New Entry dialog box New Entry Provide Private subnet devices unique IP addresses on the Public subnet Number of Entries Available Type of Entry Starting Public IP Address Starting Private IP Address Range Subnet Mask Effective Public IP Address Effective Private IP Address OK 126 iD 0 0 i 192 168 1 100 1 255 255 255 10 0 0 100 192 168 1 100 9 Do one of the following e Io translate a single address for a device on the public subnet that needs to communicate on the private subnet complete the fields below Field Type of Entry Starting Public IP Address Starting Private IP Address Effective Public Addresses Effective Private Addresses Description Choose Single This is the default value Type the existing address for the device on the public subnet Type a unigue private address to represent the device Displays the existing address for the device on the public subnet that is configured for translation If blank verify that the values in
35. Instance Bit 11 Instance Bit 12 Instance Bit 13 Instance Bit 14 Instance Bit 15 Instance Bit 16 Instance Bit 17 Instance Bit 18 Instance Bit 19 Instance Bit 20 Instance Bit 21 Instance Bit 22 Instance Bit 23 Instance Bit 24 Instance Bit 27 Appendix B Port Assignments for CIP Data This table identifies the instance numbers of the Ethernet link object associated with each port on the switch Instance 0 does not apply to all the ports as it does for bit maps The bit numbers identify each port when they are contained in a structure of all the ports such as in the output assembly Bit 0 refers to any or all ports 10 port 10 portGb 16 port 18 portGb 20 port 20 portGb 24 port Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch Any All ports Any All ports Any All ports Any All ports Any All ports Any All ports Any All ports Fa1 1 Fa1 1 Fa1 1 Fa1 1 Fa1 1 Fa1 1 Fa1 1 Fa1 2 Fa1 2 Fa1 2 Fa1 2 Fa1 2 Fa1 2 Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 3 Fa1 3 Fa1 3 Fa1 3 Fa1 3 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 4 Fa1 4 Fa1 4 Fa1 4 Fa1 4 Fa1 4 Fa1 Fal Fal Fal Fal Fal Fal Fa1 6 Fa1 6 Fa1 6 Fa1 6 Fa1 6 Fa1 6 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 7 Fa1 7 Fa1 7 Fa1 7 Fa1 7 Fa1 7 Fal Fal Fal Fal Fal Fal Fal Fa1 9 Gi1 1 Fa1 9 Fa1 9 Fa1 9 Fa1 9 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Gi1 2 Fa1 10 Fa1 10 Fa1 10 Fa1 10 Fa1 10 Fa1 11 Fa1 11 Fa1 11 Fa1 11 Fa1 11 Fa1 12 Fa1 12 Fa1 12 Fa1 12 Fa1 12 Fa1 13 Fa1 13 Fa1 13 Fa1 13 Fa1 13 Fa1 14 Fa1 14 Fa1 14 Fa1 14 Fa1 14 Fa1 15 Fa1 15 Fa1 15 Fa1 15 Fa1 15 Fa1 16 Fa1 16 Fa1 16
36. June 2014 Port Security Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Stratix 5700 switches implement MAC address based port security A MAC address is a unique address assigned to each Ethernet capable device This means that the switch can enforce communications either dynamically or statically per MAC address With dynamic port security a switch port communicates with a certain number of devices MAC addresses The port tracks only the number of devices rather than the MAC addresses of those devices Static port security adds devices to the port security table on a per MAC address basis With static dynamic port security only devices with the MAC addresses in the security table are able to communicate on that port One or both methods can be used in the Stratix 5700 switches with Full firmware on a per port basis Port Security does not apply to switches with lite firmware Dynamic Secure MAC Address MAC ID Many Smartport roles have a maximum number of MAC IDs thac can use that port For example the Smartport role Automation Device sets up the port for a maximum of one MAC ID The MAC ID is dynamic meaning the switch learns the first source MAC ID to use the port Attempts by any other MAC ID to access the port are denied If the link becomes inactive the switch dynamically relearns the MAC ID to be secured The default number of MAC IDs can be changed on the Port Security tab within the Device Manager Web interface or the
37. Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP unconditionally The port sends LACP packets to other ports to initiate negotiations to create EtherChannels A port in Active mode can form an EtherChannel with another port that is in Active or Passive mode The ports must be configured for full duplex LACP Passive This mode enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol only if an LACP device is detected at the other end of the link The port responds to requests to create EtherChannels but does not initiate such negotiations The ports must be configured for full duplex The ports that can participate in this EtherChannel The status of the group Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Configure DHCP Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 To use DHCP persistence you must first enable DHCP and set up the IP address pool Then you must assign a specific IP addresses to each port Set up the DHCP Server To enable the DHCP Server mode on the switch do the following 1 From the Configure menu choose DHCP 2 Check the Enable DHCP checkbox 3 To enable DHCP snooping check the DHCP Snooping checkbox DHCP snooping restricts broadcast of DHCP requests beyond the connected switch This means that devices receive address assignments from only the connected switch This option is available only on VLAN interfaces To enable DHCP Snooping on a specific VLAN check the DHCP Snooping checkbox fo
38. P June 2014 Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Isolate Traffic and Users By using VLANs you can isolate different types of traffic such as voice and data to preserve the quality of the transmission and to minimize excess traffic among the logical segments You can also use VLANs to isolate different types of users For example you can restrict specific data broadcasts to specific logical workgroups for security purposes such as keeping information about employee salaries only on devices in a VLAN created for payroll related communication An added benefit to using VLANS is to reduce the amount of administrative effort reguired to constantly examine reguests to network resources VLANs isolate parts of your network Therefore devices that are attached to the switch ports in the same VLAN network users in the same VLAN can communicate only with each other and can share the same data Devices attached to switch ports in different VLANs cannot communicate with cach other through the switch unless the switch is configured for routing A Stratix 5700 switch a router or a Layer 3 switch must be configured to enable routing across VLANs inter VLAN routing and additional security policies must be set If your network is also using a DHCP server make sure that the server is accessible to the devices in all the VLANs The following figure is an example network that uses VLANs based on different network traffic and network users
39. PS aAa 6 Click the Public to Private tab ADD Edit Nat Instance General BEE Private Advanced Public to Private Public Private Type Range Subnet Mask 20 20 20 1 10 10 10 1 Single Lale EMS Canc Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 159 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface 7 Click Add Row complete the fields and click Save Field Description Public IP Address Type a public IP address e To translate a single address type the existing address for the device on the public subnet e To translate a range of addresses type the first address in the range of sequential addresses To translate addresses in a subnet type the existing starting address for the range of devices on the public subnet This address must correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Subnet Mask Starting Public Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 0 or 10 200 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 32 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 6
40. PortFa1_12Threshold BOOL PortFa1_13Threshold BOOL PortFa1_ 14Threshold BOOL PortFa1_15Threshold BOOL PortFa1_16Threshold BOOL AllPortsUtilization SINT PortFa1_ 1Utilization SINT PortFa1_2Utilization SINT PortFa1_3Utilization SINT PortFa1_4Utilization SINT PortFa1_5Utilization SINT PortFa1_6Utilization SINT PortFa1_7Utilization SINT PortFa1_8Utilization SINT PortFa1_9Utilization SINT PortFa1_ 10Utilization SINT Default Display Style Valid Values Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 6 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 7 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 8 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 9 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 10 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 11 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 12 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 13 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 14 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 15 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 16 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 0 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 1 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 2 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 3 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 4 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 5 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 6 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 7 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 8 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 9 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 10 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 11 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 12 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 13 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 14 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 15 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 16 Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 253 Appendix A Modul
41. Power over Ethernet PoE 201 Smartports and VLANs 203 Port Thresholds 205 Port Security 206 Port Status 207 Port Diagnostics 208 Cable Diagnostics 209 DHCP Pool Display 210 DHCP Address Assignment 212 Time Sync Configuration 213 NAT Configuration 215 NAT Diagnostics 229 SD Flash Sync 233 Save and Restore the Switch Configuration 234 After you complete Express Setup you can manage the switch by using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application in the Studio 5000 Automation Engineering amp Design Environment Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 187 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment EtherNet IP CIP Interface Table 27 CIP Network Connections Connection Explicit messaging 1 O implicit messaging 188 Stratix 5700 switches contain an EtherNet IP network interface The EtherNet IP network is an industrial automation network specification maintained by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association ODVA It uses the Common Industrial Protocol CIP for its application layer and TCP UDP IP for its transport and network layers This interface is accessible via any of the switch s Ethernet ports by using the IP address of the switch CIP Network Connections CIP is an object oriented connection based protocol that supports two basic types of messaging explicit and implicit I O connections A maximum of 32 connections is available Both connection types must use the switch pa
42. Protocol specifications 13 speed setting 133 troubleshoot 237 Static mode PoE 88 status indicators 119 STCN interface 152 STCN segment 152 STCN STP 152 storm control described 95 thresholds 95 straight through cable pinout two twisted pair 10 100 ports 275 276 Studio 5000 environment 11 187 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 subnet mask DHCP IP address pool 138 subnet translation 104 156 159 161 219 223 switch manage via Device Manager 26 monitoring alert log 177 network analyzer 113 port mirroring 113 status 199 troubleshoot 235 Device Manager display 236 Device Manager not accessible 236 Device Manager problems 236 DHCP 235 Direct Managed mode 237 firmware upgrade 241 IP address problems 235 reset switch 240 switch software 240 wrong IP address 235 switch configuration properties 197 save and restore 234 switch software troubleshoot 240 switch power on 35 60 sync interval 147 sync limit 147 Synchronization Clock mode Boundary 145 146 End to end Transparent 145 setting 145 T threshold port 134 traffic level 95 timing message settings PTP Boundary mode 146 traffic fixups and NAT 106 161 228 traffic permits and NAT 106 161 228 traffic suppression 95 translate IP addresses 101 translation entry types 104 Transmit Detail tab dashboard 171 troubleshoot Device Manager display 236 Device Manager not accessible 236 Device Manager problems 236 DHCP 235 D
43. Setup window IP Address The IP address of this switch You can configure this setting on the Admin gt Express Setup window MAC Address The MAC address of this switch This information cannot be changed Product ID The model of this switch This information cannot be changed License Level The type of license that is installed This information cannot be changed CIP Revision The version of Common Industrial Protocol CIP that is supported on this switch CIP Serial Number Serial Number This information cannot be changed The CIP serial number This information cannot be changed The serial number of this switch This information cannot be changed Version ID The hardware version This information cannot be changed Software The version of 10S that this switch is running This information is updated when you upgrade the switch firmware Contact The person who is the administrative contact for this switch You can set this parameter on the Configure gt SNMP window Location The physical location of this switch You can set this parameter on the Configure gt SNMP window Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Switch Health You can use the health gauges to monitor the switch CPU Utilization The CPU Utilization gauge shows the percentage of CPU processing power that is in use on the switch Data is collected at each 60 second syst
44. Synchronization Precision Time Protocol 100 Every device in an IP based network must have a unique IP address The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP automatically assigns IP address information from a pool of available addresses to newly connected devices DHCP clients in the network If a device leaves and then re joins the network the device receives the next available IP address which can or cannot be the same address that it had before The switch can be set to operate as a DHCP server to provide DHCP persistence With DHCP persistence you can assign a specific IP address to each port to make sure that a device attached to a specific port receives the same IP address This feature works with only a single device connected to each port configured for DHCP persistence IMPORTANT To make sure DHCP persistence works correctly follow the application rules The IEEE 1588 standard defines a protocol called Precision Time Protocol PTP that enables precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and control systems We refer to this as CIP Sync time synchronization The clocks are synchronized over the EtherNet IP communication network PTP enables systems that include clocks of various precision resolution and stability to synchronize PTP generates a Master Slave relationship among the clocks in the system All clocks ultimately derive their time from a clock selected as the Grandmaster clock Three PTP modes are availab
45. VLANS IGMP Snooping with Ouerier Spanning Tree Protocol Port Thresholds Port Security EtherChannels DHCP Persistence CIP Sync Time Synchronization Precision Time Protocol Network Address Translation NAT Resilient Ethernet Protocol SNMP Port Mirroring Routing SD Card Synchronization Alarms Cryptographic IOS Software optional Advanced Software Features Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Page 76 82 83 85 90 93 94 95 97 98 100 100 101 107 111 113 113 114 114 114 115 Chapter 3 75 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Port Numbering The port ID consists of port type Gigabit Ethernet for Gigabit ports and Fast Ethernet for 10 100 Mbps ports unit number always 1 and port number 1 2 for Gigabit ports 1 18 for all others depending on catalog numbers Gigabit Ethernet is abbreviated as Gi and Fast Ethernet as Fa The following table shows port numbering for the switch Table 3 Port Numbering Cat No Port Numbering on Switch Labels Port Numbering in config text File 1783 BMS06SL 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots managed switch lite 1 Fa1 1 firmware 2 Fa1 2 3 Fa1 3 4 Fa1 4 5 Fa1 5 6 Fa1 6 1783 BMS06SA 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots managed switch full 1 Fa1 1 firmware 2 Fa1 2 3 Fa1 3 4 Fa1 4 5 Fa1 5 6 Fa1 6 1783 BMS06TL 6 port 6 Ethernet ports managed switch lite firmware 1 Fa1 1 2 Fa1 2 3 Fa1 3 4 Fa1 4 5 Fa1 5 6 Fa1 6 1783 BM
46. Web interface active Do not access the Device Manager Web interface from another browser session When the upgrade process completes a success message appears and the switch automatically restarts It can take a few minutes for the switch to restart with the new firmware Verify that the latest firmware revision on the switch appears in the Software field in the Switch Information area of the dashboard o File Management Software Update Current version 55700 Software S5 00 UNIVERSALK9 M Version 15 2 1 EY RELEASE SOFTWARE fc2 Software tar file can be located from the link http compatibility rockwellautemation com pages compatibilitycenter aspx Browse Update Status Stage Status 1 Loading the tar file to the switch 2 Verifying the tar file 3 Extracting the software files from the tar file 4 All software images installed See the Device Manager Web interface online help for additional guidelines and procedures Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 183 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Use the SD Card to Synchronize the Configuration or 10S Files Table 25 Manual Sync Tab Fields Field SD Card Status SD to Flash Sync Flash to SD Sync 184 Use the Sync window to synchronize the SD card with the onboard memory On the Manual Sync tab you can view the following e Whether a card is present e Card status e If present the source f
47. a a space or a tab 4 Choose a macro icon CS1 to CS10 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 127 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface 5 Enter a macro definition The definition can contain up to 3000 characters Enter the macro commands with one command per line Use the character at the beginning of a line to enter comment text within the macro Available parameters for the macro are native_vlan access_vlan and voice_vlan 6 Enter an antimacro definition The antimacro definition is the portion of the applied macro that removes the macro when you change it to another macro or when you remove it with the None Smartport role Before the macro definition can be applied to the port the antimacro must first be defined with the proper commands to set the port back to its original state The definition can contain up to 3000 characters Enter the antimacro commands with one command per line Use the character to end the macro Use the character at the beginning of a line to enter comment text within the macro 7 Click Submit 8 To discard any unsaved changes click Cancel Modify the Definition of a Custom Smartports Macro You cannot modify a custom Smartports macro that is currently in use 1 From the Configure menu choose Smartports 2 Click the Custom Smartports tab o Network Smartports Custom Smartport Macros O Add f Import Name Icon
48. a Smartport role or the native VLAN for a port associated with a NAT instance you must reassign VLANs to the NAT instance IMPORTANT Asa result of Layer 2 forwarding current traffic sessions remain established until manually disconnected If you change an existing translation you must manually disconnect all associated traffic sessions before the new translation can take effect Create NAT Instances for Traffic Routed through a Layer 3 Switch or Router To create a NAT instance for traffic routed through a Layer 3 switch or router follow these steps 1 From the Configure menu choose NAT to display the NAT window Q Security NAT NAT Instances Add f Edit W Delete C show l2nat ins Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 153 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface 2 Click Add to display the General tab of the Add Edit NAT Instance window ADD Edit Nat Instance General Public to Private Advanced Private to Public a Gil 1 Vians Enae l native vlan Public Type Range Subnet Mask 2 7 10 10 10 1 20 20 20 1 Single 1 500 Gil 2 Vlans T l native vlan F 2 E 500 Gateway Translation Edit Delete amp Add Row Public Private No data available submit Gres 3 Inthe Name field type a unique name to identify the instance The instance name cannot include spaces or exceed 32 characters 4 From the list of VLANs on the right c
49. a public IP address e To translate a single address type a unique public address to represent the device e To translate a range of addresses type the first address in the range of sequential addresses To translate addresses in a subnet type a unique starting public address to represent the devices This address must correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Starting Public Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 0 or 10 200 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 32 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 155 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Field Description Type Choose one of these values Single Translate a single address e Range Translate a range of addresses Subnet Translate all of the addresses in the private subnet or a portion of the private subnet Range Type the number of addresses to translate This field is a
50. an IP address to a specific switch port so that a device connected to that switch port always receives the same IP address Also referred to as DHCP Persistence Git Gi1 2 Fai Fal 2 Fa1 3 Fali Fa1 5 False Fal Faia Port Fool F Address evil one one ll one 10 88 84 208 one Mil one one one one es one one Status Fiunning TIP The information on this tab is not displayed if you are offline Table 41 DHCP Address Assignment Tab Fields Field Port Pool IP Address Refresh Set 212 Description Displays the ports available for the configuration The port number includes the port type Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet the switch number 1 and the specific port number EXAMPLE e Gi1 1 is Gigabit Ethernet port 1 Fal 1is Fast Ethernet port 1 Displays the pool names from the DHCP IP address pool that corresponds to the instances available in the switch If you delete all of the rows containing pools on the DHCP Pool Display tab on the Module Properties dialog box and click Refresh the Pool field is blank The Pool field is available when the switch is online and appears dimmed when the switch is offline Displays the IP address assigned to the switch port The format is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods for example 255 255 255 255 Each number can be from 0 255 IP Add
51. button on the AOP Refer to Save and Restore the Switch Configuration on page 234 for more information on the Save and Restore feature 234 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Verify Boot Fast IP Address Issues Issue IP address is not received from DHCP server Switch has wrong IP address Chapter 6 Troubleshoot the Switch Topic Page Verify Boot Fast 235 IP Address Issues 235 Device Manager Web Interface Issues 236 Switch Performance 237 Access Direct Managed Mode 237 Restart or Reset the Switch 239 Recover the Switch Firmware and Restore Factory Defaults 240 Troubleshoot a Firmware Upgrade 241 This chapter helps you resolve issues related to Stratix 5700 switches as well as perform common functions such as resetting the switch For additional troubleshooting refer to the following e Diagnose Cabling Problems on page 176 e View System Log Messages on page 177 Boot fast failures are potentially fatal to the switch Contact your Rockwell Automation representative if your switch does not successfully complete boot fast You can disable the boot fast and run a power on self test POST by using the CLI These are some basic troubleshooting tips for issues related to the switch IP address Resolution If the switch does not receive an IP address from an upstream device operating as a DHCP server make sure that the upstream device is operating as a DHCP server and again follow the proc
52. cable not supplied with the switch to connect to the standard 9 pin serial port on a personal computer e Use a standard mini USB cable not supplied with the switch to connect to the mini USB port on a personal computer e Ifyou are using the USB cable download the drivers for your Microsoft Windows computer from http www rockwellautomation com 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the console port on the switch WARNING The console port is intended only for temporary local N programming purposes and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the console cable with power applied to this module or the programming device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding 3 Start a terminal emulation program on the personal computer 4 Configure the personal computer terminal emulation software for 9600 bps 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit and no flow control 28 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Chapter 2 Switch Installation Topic Page Stratix 5700 Switch Installation 30 Installation Guidelines 31 Install or Remove the SD Card optional 33 Verify Switch Operation 34 Mount the Switch on a DIN Rail 36 Remove the Switch from the DIN Rail 38 Ground the Switch 38 Wire the Switch DC Power Source 40 Attach
53. collisions e Multiple The number of multiple collisions e Late The number of late collisions Excessive The number of frames for which transmission fails due to excessive collisions e These counters let you view errors e Alignment The number of frames received that are not an integral number of octets in length e FCS Frame Check Sequence The number of frames received that do not pass the FCS check e SOE Test Errors The number of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated e Deferred Transmissions The count of transmissions deferred by busy network e MAC Xmit Errors The number of frames that failed to transmit due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error e MAC Recv Errors The number of frames that failed to be received due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error e Carrier Sense The number of times the carrier sense condition was lost or never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame Frame Too Long The number of frames received that exceed the maximum permitted frame size 208 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics dialog box provides information to diagnose a cable issue Cable Diagnostics Port Fa1 2 TIP Port False Test last un on 7 13 2012 01 28 16 PM Diagnose F Cable Pair Status Distance to Break A No Break Detected Ho Break Detected
54. configured cutoff power is 12 W the actual cutoff value is 11 4 W which is 0 05 less than the configured value Because the switch supports external removable power supplies for PoE PoE and can configure the budget per the power supply used the total amount of power available for the powered devices varies depending on the power supply configuration e If a power supply is removed and replaced by a new power supply with less power and the module does not have enough power for the powered devices the switch denies power to the PoE ports that are in Auto mode in descending order of the port numbers If the switch still does not have enough power it denies power to the PoE ports in Static mode in descending order of the port numbers e Ifthe new power supply supports more power than the previous one and the switch now has more power available the switch grants power to the PoE ports in Static mode in ascending order of the port numbers If it still has power available the switch then grants power to the PoE ports in Auto mode in ascending order of the port numbers IMPORTANT For power to be assigned accurately the total wattage of the power supply must be manually configured via the Device Manager Web interface or CIP Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 89 Chapter 3 VLANs 90 Switch Software Features A virtual local area network VLAN is a logical segment of network users and resources grouped by
55. connect to devices such as workstations and servers you can allow an immediate connection PortFast immediately transitions the port into STP forwarding mode upon linkup To enable PortFast on an interface and apply the selected BPDU features to the interface select the interface and then check Enable Port Fast To configure Resilient Ethernet Protocol REP from the Configure menu choose REP To create a REP segment set a segment ID and port type on the desired ports Segment ID Port Type STCN Interface STCN Segment STCN STP None F None E None E None F None F F None Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 151 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Table 17 REP Fields Field REP Admin VLAN Port Name Mode Segment ID Port Type STCN Interface STCN Segment STCN STP 152 Description The administrative VLAN The range is 2 4094 The default is VLAN 1 REP ports are assigned to the same REP Admin VLAN If the REP Admin VLAN changes all REP ports are automatically assigned to the new REP Admin VLAN The number of the switch port including port type such as Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet The administrative mode To set this mode from the Configure menu choose Port Settings The ID of the segment The segment ID range is from 1 1024 If no segment ID is set REP is disabled Each REP segment must have exactly two prim
56. dual purpose port is connected and uses the port accordingly Only one port can be active at a time If both ports are connected the SFP module port has priority You cannot change the priority setting Choose from the following media types e SFP The SFP module port is active If you choose this option the speed and duplex displays the current settings and auto MDIX displays N A e RJ45 The RJ45 port is active If you choose this option you can set the port speed duplex and auto mdix values e Auto autonegotiation Either port can be active If you choose this option the speed and duplex is set to auto and auto MDIX displays N A The default is Auto Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 133 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Table 10 Port Settings continued Field Description Operational Mode The operational state of the port Displays the administrative mode or Down if disabled Access VLAN The VLAN that an interface belongs to and carries traffic for when the link is configured as or is acting as a nontrunking interface Administrative Mode Displays one of the following administrative modes e Access The interface is in permanent nontrunking mode and negotiates to convert the neighboring link into a nontrunk link even if the neighboring interface is a trunk interface If you choose this option also choose an Access VLAN An access port belongs to and carries
57. filet s ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit e La substitution de composants peut rendre cet quipement inadapte a une utilisation en environnement de Classe I Division 2 e S assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de changer les piles Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class Division 2 If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter2 European Hazardous Location Approval The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94 9 EC and has been found to comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres given in Annex II to this Directive Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079 15 and EN 60079 0 ATTENTION This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or ot
58. of Entry Choose Subnet Starting Public IP Type the existing starting address for a device on the public subnet This address Address must correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Starting Public Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 0 or 10 200 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 32 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 16 Starting Private IP Type a unique starting private address to represent the devices This address must Address correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Starting Private Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 or 192 168 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following
59. optional 33 Verily Switch OperatiGn a ce Y dn GAN UD ees 34 Mount the Switch ona DIN Rail Y Y YY eee 36 Remove the Switch from the DIN Rail YY ui uu 38 Ground the Switch cavwauvsatdos eretara tiei eie 38 Wire the Switch DC Power Source 0 cece eee eee eee 40 Attach the Switch Power Connectors YY uu 43 Wire the Power over Ethernet DC Power Source 44 Attach the PoE Power Connector YY Y eud 46 Install an SFP Module optional cc YY ee Yu 46 Remove SFP Modules from SFP Module Slots 48 Wire the External Alarms YY FFY YY eee 49 Attach the Alarm Relay Connector to the Switch 52 Connect to 10 100and10 100 1000Ports 52 Connect to LOBASE T 100BASE IX or 1000BASE T Ports 53 Connect t Po EE Port i ce ie coeds eee GG DY DOG 54 Connect to SFP Modules FFY c Y Y Y uu 55 Connect to a Dual purpose Port YY Y YY ug 56 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 5 Table of Contents Switch Software Features ArmorStratix 5700 Switch Installation YY eee 57 Installation Guidelines 0 YY FFY eee LL Y eu 57 Install or Remove the SD Card optional 59 Verily Switch Operation scaveverneStenes Gruen DUE 60 MounttheSwitch CR GU O DO O ees 61
60. or 10 200 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 32 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 16 158 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Field Description Type Choose one of these values Single Translate a single address e Range Translate a range of addresses Subnet Translate all of the addresses in the private subnet or a portion of the private subnet Range Type the number of addresses to translate This field is available only if you choose Range in the Type field Valid values 1 128 Default value 1 IMPORTANT Each address in the range counts as one translation entry The switch supports a maximum of 128 translation entries Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for the addresses to translate Valid values e Class B 255 255 0 0 e Class C 255 255 255 0 e Portion of Class C 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 provides 128 addresses per translation entry provides 64 addresses per translation entry provides 32 addresses per translation entry provides 16 addresses per translation entry DDO
61. persistence table DHCP Snooping is selected Reserved Only is not checked Switch 1 Switch 2 FA1 FA H3 _FM FA4 FA5 FA6 FAS Then A new device connected to switch 1 FA1 receives an IP address from the Switch 1 persistence table A broadcast request is also sent across the network Switch 2 responds if there is an unassigned address in its pool This can override the assignment made by switch 1 A new device connected to switch 1 FA1 receives an IP address from the switch 1 persistence table A broadcast request is also sent across the network Switch 2 does not respond to the request Note that if the device is connected to FA7 of switch 1 it does not receive an IP address from the switch pool because it is not defined in the persistence table and unused addresses in the pool are blocked A new device is connected to FA1 receives an IP address from the persistence table A broadcast reguest is also sent across the network Switch 2 does not respond to the reguest In addition a device connected to FA4 receives an IP address from the switch 2 persistence table A broadcast request is sent out and switch 1 responds with an unused IP address from its pool This can override the assigned port A new device connected to switch 1 FA1 receives an IP address from the Switch 1 persistence table A broadcast request is not sent across the network therefore Switch 2 does not respond Note that if a device is connected to FA7 not defined in the DHCP p
62. requirements 256 color VGA graphics adapter 800 x 600 min resolution True Color 1024 x 768 recommended Resolution 800 x 600 min resolution True Color 1024 x 768 recommended Cisco Network Assistant Cisco Network Assistant is a Web interface that you download from Cisco s website and run on your computer It offers advanced options for configuring and monitoring multiple devices including switches switch clusters switch stacks routers and access points To use the software follow these steps 1 Go to http www cisco com go NetworkAssistant You must be a registered user but you need no other access privileges 2 Find the Network Assistant installer 3 Download the Network Assistant installer and run it You can run it directly from the Web if your browser offers this choice 4 When you run the installer follow the displayed instructions 5 In the final panel click Finish to complete the Network Assistant installation 6 See the Network Assistant online help for more information Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 27 Chapter1 About the Switches Command Line Interface You can manage the switch from the command line interface CLI by connecting your personal computer directly to the switch console port or through the network by using Telnet To access the CLI through the console port follow these steps 1 Connect to the console port in one of these ways e Use a RJ45 to DB 9 adapter
63. software This can be used with devices running up to two MAC addresses e Port is set to Access mode e Portfast is enabled e Port security supports two MAC IDs IMPORTANT Do not apply the Virtual Desktop for Automation role to ports that are connected to switches routers or access points Apply this role to ports to be connected to other switches with Spanning Tree enabled Port is set to Trunk mode Apply this role to ports to be connected to routers or Layer 3 switches with routing services enabled Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 83 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Table 4 Smartport Roles continued Port Role Phone for Automation Wireless for Automation Port Mirroring None S1 S10 84 Description Apply this role to ports to be connected to IP phones A desktop device such as a computer can be connected to the IP phone Both the IP phone and the connected computer have network access through the port e Port is set to Trunk mode e Port security supports three MAC IDs to this port This role prioritizes voice traffic over general data traffic to provide clear voice reception on the IP phones Apply this role to ports to be connected to wireless access points The access point can provide network access to as many as 30 wireless users Apply this role to ports to be monitored by a network analyzer For more information about port mirroring see Port Mirroring on page
64. suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA or be approved for the application if nonmetallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subseguent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are reguired to comply with certain product safety certifications In addition to this publication see the following e Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 for additional installation requirements e NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures North American Hazardous Location Approval The following information applies when operating this equipment in Informations sur l utilisation de cet equipement en environnements hazardous locations dangereux Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class Division 2 Groups Les produits marqu s CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent qu une utilisation en A B C D Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied environnements de Classe Division 2 Groupes A
65. switch port e The number of MAC addresses on the port exceeds the maximum number supported on the port 162 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Port security supports multiple security levels The ability to define the number of devices that are connected to a given port These are assigned on a first come first served basis and time out after a certain period of inactivity The ability to easily store the existing MAC Address configuration by selecting Add Learned MAC Addresses on the Static MAC Address Table The ability to manually add and remove MAC Addresses on a per port basis To change the Static MAC Addresses table for a port do the following 1 Click the radio button next to the port to configure 2 Click Edit 3 4 Configure MAC addresses as follows Clear or check the Enable checkbox e To add the existing MAC addresses of devices currently connected to a port click Add Learned MAC Addresses e To adda specific MAC address to the table type a MAC address in the format fields and click Add e To remove a MAC address from the table select the MAC address and click Remove e lo clear the MAC address table click Remove All PortSecurity Fal 1 Static Mac Table e Port Name Fal 1 Enable Maximum MAC Count Add Learned MAC Addresses Po aii Remove Removeall K Ca
66. that contain the translation 232 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 SD Flash Sync You can sync the SD card to either the configuration file or the entire image IMPORTANT You can overwrite your configuration if you synchronize in the wrong direction SD Flash Status synchronization Status 5D Flash Present Mo Configuration Files SD Flash Status Entire Image Copy from 5D Flash to Switch Copy contig text and vlan dat to Switch Copy 105 to Switch Copy config text and wlan dat to SD Flash E Copy 105 to SD Flash Refresh Communication Status Running o Table 47 SD Flash Sync Tab Fields Field Description SD Flash Status Indicates whether the SD card is present and the card s status Synchronization Status Indicates whether the configuration files and the lOS are synchronized or unsynchronized Copy from SD Flash to Switch Choose from these options e Copy Configuration Copy 10S Image Copy from Switch to SD Flash Choose from these options e Copy Configuration Copy 10S Image Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 233 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Save and Restore the Use this tab to do the following Switch Configuration e Save the switch configuration to a file for archiving e Restore a switch configuration stored locally on the co
67. that the public network must be internet routable Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 101 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Figure 4 Layer 3 Example Machine 1 M Stratix 5700 NAT NAT1 192 168 1 2 Controller C1 1 0 Drive 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 12 10 10 1 10 HMI 10 200 1 2 Line Controller LC 10 200 1 3 Layer 3 Device Stratix 8300 VLAN 10 10 10 1 1 192 168 1 1 NAT GW VLAN 200 10 200 1 1 QtolC VLAN 10 VLAN10 _ Machine 2 M2 Stratix 5700 NAT NATZ 192 168 1 1 Controller 2 192 168 1 10 10 10 1 11 1 0 Drive 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 12 M ss 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Figure 5 Layer 2 Example HMI 10 10 1 101 _ _ y VLAN 10 Line Controller LC 10 10 1 100 1 192 168 100 7 7 tolt 47 Layer 2 Device Stratix 8000 VLAN 10 10 10 1 1 4 VLAN 10 VLAN10 Machine 1 M1 Machine 2 M2 Stratix 5700 NAT NAT1 192 168 1 2 wv Mu O E Controller C1 1 0 Drive 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 12 10 10 1 10 Stratix 5700 NAT NAT2 192 168 1 2 Controller C2 1 0 Drive 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 12 10 10 1 11 gt Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 103 Chapter 3 104 Switch Software Features An address transl
68. the CLI Refer to Appendix C for an alarm wiring example Alarm signals are connected to the switch through the 6 way alarm relay connector Three connections are dedicated to the alarm input An alarm input and the reference ground wiring connection are required to complete a single input alarm circuit You must provide either an NO or an NC dry contact to complete the alarm circuit between reference ground and the alarm input The three remaining connections for the Form C output alarm circuit are as follows e NO output e NC output e common An alarm output and the common wiring connection are required to complete a single output alarm circuit The Form C output alarm relay provides one NO and one NC dry contact Use M12 A coded cable to connect to the alarm connector on the switch Recommended torque is 0 5 0 8 Nem 4 43 7 08 lbein The recommended cable part number from Molex is 1200650523 One end of the cable has M12 A coded connector and the other end is open The labels for the alarm relay connector are on the switch panel Table 2 Alarm Relay Connector Labels Label Connection NO Alarm Output Normally Open NO connection COM Alarm Output Common connection NC Alarm Output Normally Closed NC connection REF Alarm Input Reference Ground connection IN1 Alarm Input 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 65 Chapter2 Switch Installation an isolated source and limited to less tha
69. the auto MDIX feature is enabled the switch detects the required cable type straight through or crossover for copper Ethernet connections and configures the interfaces accordingly You can use the command line interface CLI to disable the auto MDIX feature See the online help for more information The switch configuration file config txt is in ASCII human readable format This configuration file is stored in nonvolatile memory and is read into the switches Random Access Memory RAM as the running configuration when the switch is powered up When any changes are made to the configuration the changes immediately take effect in the running configuration The Device Manager Web interface and the Add on Profile AOP for the Logix Designer application automatically write changes to flash memory to be retained for the next power up cycle Any changes made via the CLI must be manually written to flash memory to be retained for the next power up cycle The switch is equipped with a slot for an optional Secure Digital SD card in addition to the onboard flash memory The SD card can be used instead of onboard flash memory to easily restore a switch configuration in case of failure or to easily duplicate configurations when you are deploying a new network If the SD card is installed on the switch the switch starts the IOS and configuration present on the SD card If the SD card is not installed or files are not present the swi
70. the fields above are valid Displays the unigue private address to represent the device If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid e To translate a range of addresses for devices on the public subnet that need to communicate on the private subnet complete the fields below Field Type of Entry Starting Public IP Address Starting Private IP Address Range Effective Public Addresses Effective Private Addresses Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Description Choose Range Type the existing starting address for the device on the public subnet Type a unigue starting private address to represent the devices Type the number of addresses to include in the range Valid values 1 128 Default value 1 IMPORTANT Each address in the range counts as one translation entry The switch supports a maximum of 128 translation entries Displays the range of existing addresses for devices on the public subnet that are configured for translation If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid Displays the range of unigue private addresses to represent the devices If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid 225 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment e Io translate all of the addresses in the public subnet or a portion of the public subnet complete the fields as described in the table below Field Description Type
71. to the switch Contact your Rockwell Automation representative immediately if your switch does not complete the start sequence successfully IMPORTANT You can disable boot fast and run the Power on Self Test POST by using the IOS CLI See the appropriate documentation at http www Cisco com for more information 3 After successfully running this test do the following a Turn off power to the switch b Disconnect the cables c Decide where you want to install the switch Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 Mount the Switch rack you must take special precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following guidelines are provided to ensure your safety e This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack e When mounting this unit in a partially filled rack load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack e Ifthe rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the unit in the rack ATTENTION To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a To mount the switch follow these steps 1 Position the rear panel of the switch against the wall or a panel in the desired location 2 Place a number 10 screw that you provide through each mounting ear and screw them into the wall 32477 Rockwell Auto
72. with either lite or full firmware Description 6 SFP port 4 Ethernet ports 2 Gigabit ports managed switch lite firmware 6 SFP port 4 Ethernet ports 2 Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots managed switch lite firmware 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots managed switch full firmware 6 port 6 Ethernet ports managed switch lite firmware 6 port 6 Ethernet ports managed switch full firmware 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 SFP Gigabit slots managed switch lite firmware 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 SFP Gigabit slots managed switch full firmware 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo ports managed switch lite firmware 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo ports managed switch full firmware 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch lite firmware 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware network address translation NAT 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware PTP 18 port 12 Ethernet ports 4 PoE PoE ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware NAT conformal coating 18 port 12 Ethernet ports 4 PoE PoE ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch
73. 00 1000 ports in an EtherChannel e All are enabled A disabled port in an EtherChannel is treated as a link failure and its traffic is transferred to one of the remaining ports in the EtherChannel IMPORTANT Do not enable Layer 3 addresses on the physical EtherChannel interfaces To create modify and delete EtherChannels from the Configure menu choose EtherChannels oO Network EtherChannels o Add f Edit W Delete Channel Group Number a Channel Mode Ports Channel Status a4 Static Fal 3 Layer Down LACP Active Fal 6 Layer Down Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 135 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Table 12 EtherChannel Fields Field Channel Group Number Channel Mode Ports Channel Status 136 Description A number from 1 to 6 that identifies this EtherChannel You can configure as many as six EtherChannels Determines how ports become active With all options except On negotiations occur to determine which ports become active Incompatible ports are put into an independent state and continue to carry data traffic but do not participate in the EtherChannel IMPORTANT Ensure that all of the ports in an EtherChannel are configured with the same speed and duplex mode These are the available modes Static All ports join the EtherChannel without negotiations This mode can be useful if the remote device does not support the protocols requ
74. 13 Fa1 14 Fa1 15 Fa1 16 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 1783 BMS12T4E2CGL 18 port 12 Ethernet ports 4 PoE PoE ports 2 combo Gigabit Fa1 1 ports managed switch lite firmware Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Fa1 11 Fa1 12 Fa1 13 Fa1 14 Fa1 15 Fa1 16 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 1783 BMS20CL 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo ports managed Fa1 1 switch lite firmware Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Fa1 11 Fa1 12 Fa1 13 Fa1 14 Fa1 15 Fa1 16 Fa1 17 Fa1 18 Fa1 19 Fa1 20 CON CG UI BW NJ Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 79 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Table 3 Port Numbering continued Cat No Port Numbering on Switch Labels Port Numbering in config text File 1783 BMS20CA 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo ports managed Fa1 1 switch full firmware Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Fa1 11 Fa1 12 Fa1 13 Fa1 14 Fa1 15 Fa1 16 Fa1 17 Fa1 18 Fa1 19 Fa1 20 1783 BMS20CGL 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo Gigabit ports Fa1 1 managed switch lite firmware Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Fa1 11 Fa1 12 Fa1 13 Fa1 14 Fa1 15 Fa1 16 Fa1 17 Fa1 18 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 80 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Table 3 Port Numbering continued Cat No Po
75. 168 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 On the Add Edit Profile Instance window you can configure the alarms and actions for an alarm profile ADD Edit Profile Instance ai Alarm Name DM Alarms SNMP Trap HW Relay Syslog Link Fault A A E F Port Not Forwarding F E E E Port Not Operating E E E E Fes Bit Error Rate T E Ir F _ Cancel Field Description Name A unique name for the alarm profile Alarm Name These types of alarms can trigger an action DM Alarms Alarm information appears on the dashboard of the Device Manager Web interface SNMP Trap Alarm traps will be sent to an SNMP server if SNMP is enabled on the Configure gt Security gt SNMP window HW Relay The switch s alarm relay is triggered sending a fault signal to a connected external alarm device such as a bell light or other signaling device that you have configured Syslog ia traps are recorded in the syslog You can view the syslog on the Monitor gt Syslog window Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 169 Chapter 4 Monitor Trends Table 18 Trends Graphs Graph Bandwidth Utilization Packet Error Port Utilization Errors PoE Utilization 170 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface You can view historical data to help you to analyze traffic patterns and to identify problems Data can be
76. 1783 BMS06SGA 1783 BMSO6IGL 1783 BMSO6TGA 7 48 cm 2 94 in Allen Bradley ExjPess Stratix 5700 Allen Bradle Ses oo QO Stratix 5700 a Express Setup 12 95 cm 5 1in 12 19 cm 4 8in TL TE om 11 67 cm j 5 cm 0 29in 4 59in 0 i iF as 10 92 cm 0 29 in cohen 4 3 in 18 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 10 port Switches 1783 BMS10CL 1783 BMS10CA 1783 BMS10CGL 1783 BMS10CGA 9 14 cm 3 6in Exess Stratix 5700 Setup Allen Bradley Alarm IN1 IN2 OUT 11 67 cm 4 59 in 10 92 cm 10 port Switch 1783 BMS10CGP 1783 BMS10CGN 9 14 cm 3 6in ioooo Allen Bradley Exess Stratix 5700 Setup 5 345 in 0 75 cm 12 83 cm 0 29 in 5 05in Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 About the Switches Chapter 1 0 75 cm 0 29 in 19 Chapter1 About the Switches 18 and 20 port Switches 1783 BMS12T4E2CGNK 1783 BMS12T4E2CGP 1783 BMS12T4E2CGL 1783 BMS20CL 1783 BMS20CA 1783 BMS20CGL 1783 BMS20CGP 1783 BMS20CGN 1783 BMS20CGPK 12 70 cm k 5 0in Allen Bradle 20000 g Strati 5100 Setup 2 o o c o o 12 95 cm 5 1in IN1 IN2 OUT sOOOOm Li 13 58 cm 5 345 in 0 75 cm 12 83 cm 0 29 in 5 05 in 20 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 About the Switches Chapter 1 30 09 cm 1783 ZMS1
77. 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 139 Chapter 4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface If you are using DHCP persistence we recommend that you initially assign static IP addresses to end devices If an end device fails and is replaced the DHCP persistence feature assigns an IP address from the DHCP persistence table The device functions properly with this IP address but we recommend that you reassign a static IP address to the replaced devices The following figure and table illustrate DHCP persistence behavior Table 13 DHCP Persistence Behavior 140 Switch 1 has ports FAT FA3 in its persistence table Switch 2 has ports FA4 FA5 FA6 and FA8 in its persistence table Reserve Only is not selected and DHCP snooping is off Switch 1 has ports FAT FA3 in its persistence table Switch 2 has ports FA4 FA5 FA6 and FAS in its persistence table Reserve Only is selected in both switches and DHCP snooping is off Switch 1 has ports FAT FA3 in its persistence table Switch 2 has ports FA4 FA5 FA6 and FA8 in its persistence table Reserve Only is selected in switch 1 and DHCP snooping is off but not switch 2 when DHCP snooping is off Switch 1 has ports FAT FA3 in its persistence table Switch 2 has ports FA4 FA5 FA6 and FA8 in its persistence table DHCP Snooping is selected Reserved Only is checked Switch 1 has ports FAT FA3 in its persistence table Switch 2 has ports FA4 FA5 FA6 and FA8 in its
78. 18 LinkStatus 19 LinkStatus 20 UnauthorizedDevice 0 UnauthorizedDevice 1 UnauthorizedDevice 2 UnauthorizedDevice 3 UnauthorizedDevice 4 UnauthorizedDevice 5 UnauthorizedDevice 6 UnauthorizedDevice 7 UnauthorizedDevice 8 UnauthorizedDevice 9 UnauthorizedDevice 10 UnauthorizedDevice 11 UnauthorizedDevice 12 UnauthorizedDevice 13 UnauthorizedDevice 14 UnauthorizedDevice 15 UnauthorizedDevice 16 UnauthorizedDevice 17 UnauthorizedDevice 18 UnauthorizedDevice 19 UnauthorizedDevice 20 ThresholdExceeded 0 Appendix A 255 Appendix A 256 Module defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Type Default Display Valid Values Style Member Name PortFa1_ 1Threshold PortFa1_2Threshold PortFa1_3Threshold PortFa1_4Threshold PortFa1_5Threshold PortFa1_6Threshold PortFa1_ Threshold PortFa1_8Threshold PortFa1_9Threshold PortFa1_ 10Threshold PortFa1_ 11Threshold PortFa1_ 12Threshold PortFa1_ 13Threshold PortFa1_ 14Threshold PortFa1_ 15Threshold PortFa1_ 16Threshold PortFa1_ 17Threshold PortFa1_ 18Threshold PortGi1_1Threshold PortGi1_2Threshold AllPortsUtilization PortFa1_ 1Utilization PortFa1_2Utilization PortFa1_3Utilization PortFa1_4Utilization PortFa1_5Utilization PortFa1_6Utilization PortFa1_7Utilization PortFa1_ 8Utilization PortFa1_ 9Utilization PortFa1_ 10Utilization PortFa1_ 11Utilization PortFa1_ 12Utilization PortFa1_ 13Utilization PortFa1_ 14Utilization PortFa1_ 15Utilization PortFa1_ 1
79. 2014 3 Summary of Changes Notes 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Preface About the Switches Switch Installation Table of Contents Studio 5000 Environment cc FFY YL YY uu 11 Access Product Release Notes FFY LL FFY LL uu 12 Additional Resources eu GA CAR i GG 13 Chapter 1 SLC O ON Gn DOD dra Oa NG 0252044 16 Switch Software Features Y FFY Y Y YY uu 17 Stratix 5700 Switch Dimensions L YY FFY uu 18 ArmorStratix 5700 Switch Dimensions YY LL eens 21 Switch Front Panel co nt y yR RC GU A AR 22 Switch Hardware Featur S LL FFY YY YY uu 22 Connowration Filesi c2 i0pniasoiuteasoaseahdnedsoweniytateanahats 23 SOC FT _ uNU eC WAA NN 23 SIG ard S Nec hci cena den veet E ie phate ace sees 24 Switch Memory Allocation cccccccccc c Y YY uo 25 Device Manager Web Interface irris sve sus ident ddd ba Es 26 Hardware Requirements au GU OECD OEA 26 Software Reguircinen ae dure 0628207242262425 EA 26 Studio 5000 Environment LL cece eee FY Yu udd 27 Hardware Requirements occcecaccceceseaaa 27 Cisco Network Assistant oea a DYGODD DOD ym CommandLinelInterfac6 LL FFY Y Y uu 28 Chapter 2 Stratix 5700 Switch Installation oa uag RD ecce 30 Installation Guidelines cc cece eee uu ud 31 Install or Remove the SD Card
80. 28 7 0 4 192 7 0 4 E Private Public Subnet Number Of Packets F Table 45 Private to Public Translation Diagnostics Field Description Private Displays the existing address for a device on the private subnet Public Displays a unique public address that represents the corresponding device on the private subnet Subnet Indicates whether the translation is part of a Subnet entry type Number of Packets Displays the number of packets that contain the translation Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 231 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Public to Private Translation Diagnostics From the Public to Private Translations dialog box for an instance you can view a list of IP addresses that have been changed by NAT within the last 90 seconds Table Public To Private Translations Active Translations in last 90 Seconds Public Private Subnet Number Qf Packets E 128 7 0 2 1927 02 1207412 1927412 Table 46 Public to Private Translation Diagnostics Field Description Public Displays the unique IP address on the public subnet that represents the corresponding IP address on the private subnet Private Displays the IP address on the private subnet that was changed to a unique IP address on the public subnet Subnet Indicates whether the translation is part of a Subnet entry type Number of Packets Displays the number of packets
81. 3 UM004E EN P June 2014 ArmorStratix 5700 Switch Installation N Switch Installation Chapter 2 ATTENTION Environment and Enclosure This equipment is intended for use in overvoltage Category ll applications as defined in IEC 60664 1 at altitudes up to 2000 m 6562 ft without derating This equipment is not intended for use in residential environments and may not provide adequate protection to radio communication services in such environments This equipment is supplied as enclosed equipment It should not require additional system enclosure when used in locations consistent with the enclosure type ratings Stated in the Specifications section of this publication Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific enclosure type ratings beyond what this product provides that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications In addition to this publication see the following e Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 for additional installation requirements e NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures Installation Guidelines A A A ATTENTION Prevent Electrostatic Discharge This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment e
82. 328 ft of the switch Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Feature 100BASE FN SX ports 1000BASE FX SX ports PoE ports Auto MDIX Configuration Files SD Card Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 About the Switches Chapter1 Description The IEEE 802 3 2002 100BASE FX ports provide full duplex 100 Mbps connectivity over multi mode fiber MMF cables These ports use a built in small form factor fixed SFF fiber optic transceiver module that accepts a dual LC connector The IEEE 802 3 2002 1000BASE FX ports on some models provide full duplex 1 Gbps connectivity over multi mode fiber MMF cables These ports use a built in small form factor fixed SFF fiber optic transceiver module that accepts a dual LC connector The PoE ports available on some models can be configured for PoE IEEE 802 3af or PoE IEEE 802 3at Type 2 e For PoE configuration the PoE ports require an external 2 wire 48V DC input power source e For PoE configuration the PoE ports require an external 2 wire 54V DC input power source When connecting the switch to workstations servers and routers straight through cables are normally used However the automatic medium dependent interface crossover auto MDIX feature of the switch is enabled by default and automatically reconfigures the ports to use either a straight through or crossover cable type The Auto MDIX feature is enabled by default When
83. 4 gt Gateway Translation Public 10 Private Refresh Communication lt 220 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 2 In the Name field type a unique name to identify the instance The instance name cannot include spaces or exceed 32 characters 3 From the list of VLANs on the right check che checkbox next to each VLAN to assign to the instance For more information about VLAN assignments see page 105 4 Click New Entry to display the New Entry dialog box New Entry Provide Private subnet devices unique IP addresses on the Public subnet Number of Entries Available Type of Entry Starting Private IP Address Starting Public IP Address Range Subnet Mask Effective Private Addresses 192 168 1 10 Effective Public Addresses 10 0 0 10 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 221 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment 5 Do one of the following e Io translate a single address for a device on the private subnet that needs to communicate on the public subnet complete the fields below Field Description Type of Entry Choose Single This is the default value Starting Private IP Address Type the existing address for the device on the private subnet Starting Public IP Address Type a unique public address to represent the device
84. 4 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 16 Private IP Address Type a private IP address e To translate a single address type a unique private address to represent the device e To translate a range of addresses type the first address in the range of sequential addresses e To translate addresses in a subnet type a unique starting private address to represent the devices This address must correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Subnet Mask Starting Private Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 or 192 168 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 32 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 16 160 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Field Type Range Subnet Mask Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Description Choose one of these values Single Translate a single address e Range Translate a range of addresses e Subnet Translate a
85. 5 copper or SFP fiber media types Only one of these connections in each of the dual purpose ports can be active at a time If both ports are connected the SFP module port has priority You can set the copper RJ45 ports to operate at 10 100 or 1000 Mbps 1000Mbps is not supported on all modules with combo ports full duplex or half duplex You can configure them as fixed 10 100 or 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports and can configure the duplex setting You can use approved Gigabit or 100 Mbps Ethernet SFP modules to establish fiber optic connections to other switches These transceiver modules are field replaceable providing the uplink interfaces when inserted in an SFP module slot You use fiber optic cables with LC connectors to connect to a fiber optic SFP module These ports operate only in full duplex You can set the 10 100 ports to operate at 10 or 100 Mbps full duplex or half duplex You can also set these ports for speed and duplex autonegotiation in compliance with IEEE 802 3 2002 The default setting is autonegotiate When set for autonegotiation the port senses the speed and duplex settings of the attached device If the connected device also supports autonegotiation the switch port negotiates the best connection that is the fastest line speed that both devices support and full duplex transmission if the attached device supports it and configures itself accordingly In all cases the attached device must be within 100 m
86. 5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Table 42 Time Sync Configuration Tab Fields Field Switch PTP Enable Port Port Enable Port State Refresh Set 214 Description Check to enable the PTP on the device By default PTP is enabled on all of the Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports on the switch Clear the checkbox to disable the PTP on the device The Port Enable and Port State features appear dimmed when the Switch PTP Enable checkbox is cleared Displays the port selected for configuration The port number includes the port type Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet and the specific port number EXAMPLE Gi1 1 is Gigabit Ethernet port 1 Check to enable the configuration of the port on the device Clear the checkbox to disable the port configuration on the device The Port Enable feature appears dimmed when the Switch PTP Enable checkbox is cleared Displays the current state of the PTP port on the device Valid values Initializing Faulty Disabled Listening Pre Master Master Uncalibrated Slave The Port State field is blank and dimmed when the Switch PTP Enable checkbox is cleared Click to refresh the tab with new data from the switch Click to send the settings to the switch The Enter Password dialog box can appear Be prepared to enter a valid password to set configuration settings The Set button appears dimmed when the switch is offline Rockwell Automation Publicatio
87. 5 Time The combination of the storm control suppression level and the 1 second time interval controls the way the port thresholds algorithm works A higher threshold enables more packets to pass through A threshold value of 100 means that no limit is placed on the traffic A value of 0 0 means that all broadcast multicast or unicast traffic on that port is blocked IMPORTANT Because packets do not arrive at uniform intervals the 1 second time interval during which traffic activity is measured can affect the behavior of port thresholds Outgoing rate limiting Outgoing port thresholds limit the rate at which the switch communicates with a client device as a percentage of wire speed the amount of the rate limit as a percentage of the total Limiting bandwidth to specific users and ports helps control network congestion enable high performance create efficient networks and prevent a small number of devices from monopolizing network bandwidth It can also improve reliability by limiting maximum bandwidth to end devices that are not be capable of handling large amounts of traffic From the Device Manager Web interface or the Logix Designer application AOP you can enable or disable rate limiting on a per port basis Default Port Thresholds Configuration By default incoming unicast broadcast and multicast port thresholds are disabled Outgoing port thresholds are also disabled 96 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P
88. 6TA 1783 ZMS8T8E2TGP 16 port Switches 23 5cm imensions 1783 ZMS8TA 1783 ZMS4T4E2TGP 8 port Switches ArmorStratix 5700 Switch D 0000 a exee 6 CV OOQ eeee E E O09 E S C0 oO HK lt m Bae 0000 L uU r ee V 000 E ei V V N Z 24 port Switch 1783 ZMS24TA 7 S F a CSS a 1 SN FN OO e D 21 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Chapter1 About the Switches Switch Front Panel Switch Hardware Features Feature Power and relay connectors Console port Dual purpose uplink ports 10 100 ports 22 The switch front panel contains the ports status indicators and power and relay connectors These diagrams are representative of the switch front panels Actual front panels vary depending on the catalog number ArmorStratix 5700 Switch Stratix 5700 Switch 32276 M These hardware features are available with the switches Descr
89. 6Utilization PortFa1_ 17Utilization PortFa1_ 18Utilization Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 ThresholdExceeded 1 ThresholdExceeded 2 ThresholdExceeded 3 ThresholdExceeded 4 ThresholdExceeded 5 ThresholdExceeded 6 ThresholdExceeded 7 ThresholdExceeded 8 ThresholdExceeded 9 ThresholdExceeded 10 ThresholdExceeded 11 ThresholdExceeded 12 ThresholdExceeded 13 ThresholdExceeded 14 ThresholdExceeded 15 ThresholdExceeded 16 ThresholdExceeded 17 ThresholdExceeded 18 ThresholdExceeded 19 ThresholdExceeded 20 Module defined Input Data Type 18 port Gb switches Module defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Default Display Valid Values Style PortGil_1Utilization PortGi1_2Utilization MajorAlarmRelay MulticastGroupsActive AB STRATIX_5700_18PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 AlarmRelay 0 Member Name Default Display Valid Values Style AnyPortConnected PortFa1_ 1Connected PortFa1_ 2Connected PortFa1_ 3Connected PortFa1_ 4Connected PortFa1_5Connected PortFa1_ 6Connected PortFa1_ 7Connected PortFa1_ 8Connected PortFa1_ 9Connected PortFa1_ 10Connected PortFa1_11Connected PortFa1_ 12Connected PortFa1_ 13Connected PortFa1_ 14Connected PortFa1_ 15Connected PortFa1_ 16Connected PortGi1_ 1Connected PortGi1_ 2Connected AnyPortUnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 2UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 3UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_4UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 5Unauth
90. 7 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment 5 Do one of the following e Io translate a single address for a device on the private subnet that needs to communicate on the public subnet complete the fields below Field Description Type of Entry Choose Single This is the default value Starting Private IP Address Type the existing address for the device on the private subnet Starting Public IP Address Type a unique public address to represent the device Effective Private Addresses Displays the existing address for the device on the private subnet that is configured for translation If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid Effective Public Addresses Displays the unique public address to represent the device If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid e To translate a range of addresses for devices on the private subnet that need to communicate on the public subnet complete the fields below Field Description Type of Entry Choose Range Starting Private IP Address Type the existing starting address for the device on the private subnet Starting Public IP Address Type a unique starting public address to represent the device Range Type the number of addresses to include in the range Valid values 1 128 Default value 1 IMPORTANT Each address in the range counts as one translation entry The switch supports a maximum of 128 translation entries
91. A C Test C510 3 Check the checkbox next to the macro to modify 128 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 4 Click Edit ADD Edit Custom Smartport Macro Name Test Icon C510 Available Parameters native_vlan Saccess_vlan voice_vlan switchport mode access switchport access vlan Saccess vlan switchport voice vlan voice_vian Macro Definition switchport trunk native vlan native_vian no switchport mode access no switchport access vlan Saccess vlan no switchport voice vlan voice_vlan Anti Macro Definition no switchport trunk native vlan native_vlan no macro description ETIS cancel 5 Change the definitions as needed 6 Click Submit Delete a Custom Smartports Macro You cannot delete a custom Smartports macro that is currently in use 1 From the Configure menu choose Smartports 2 Click the Custom Smartports tab 3 Check the checkbox next to the macro to delete Network Smartports Smartport Role Custom Smartports Custom Smartport Macros Add Edit Delete Import f Export C Name Icon Test C510 4 Click Delete Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 129 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Import a Custom Smartports Macro You must use Firefox 3 6 or higher to import a custom Smartports macro 1 From the
92. B OLD CISCO MEMORY MIB OLD CISCO SYS MIB OLD CISCO SYSTEM MIB OLD CISCO TCP MIB OLD CISCO TS MIB RMON MIB RMON2 MIB SMON MIB SNMP COMMUNITY MIB SNMP FRAMEWORK MIB SNMP MPD MIB SNMP NOTIFICATION MIB SNMP PROXY MIB SNMP TARGET MIB SNMP USM MIB SNMP VIEW BASED ACM MIB SNMPv2 MIB TCP MIB UDP MIB Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Port Mirroring Routing Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Port mirroring is for advanced users with experience in troubleshooting traffic and protocol issues on networks The port mirroring feature copies or mirrors traffic on one port to a monitoring port where the packet can be captured by a network protocol analyzer tool Use port mirroring as a diagnostic tool or debugging feature Port mirroring does not affect the switching of network traffic on the monitored port You must dedicate a monitoring port for port mirroring use Except for traffic that is being copied for the port mirroring session the monitoring port does not receive or forward traffic You can configure port mirroring by assigning the Port Mirroring Smartport role on a switch port via the Device Manager Web interface The switch supports these forms of routing e Static routing Defines explicit paths between two devices routers and switches You must manually define the route information including the destination IP address destination subnet mask and next hop router IP address e C
93. Be sure that no exposed portion of the DC input power source wire extends from the connector s or terminal blocks 32279 M 7 Use a ratcheting torgue screwdriver to torque the power connector captive screws above the installed wire leads to 0 23 Nem 2 0 lbein Do not exceed the recommended torgue 32281 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 8 Connect the other end of the positive wire to the positive terminal on the DC power source and connect the other end of the return wire to the return terminal on the DC power source When you are testing the switch one power connection is sufficient If you are installing the switch and are using a second power source repeat this procedure with the second power connector The following figure shows the completed DC input wiring on a power connector for a primary power source and an optional secondary power source 32282 M Attach the Switch Power Connectors To attach the switch power connectors to the front panel of the switch follow these steps 1 Insert one power connector into the Pwr A receptacle on the switch front panel and the other into the Pwr B receptacle Pwr A Receptacle Pwr B Receptacle 32283 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 43 Chapter2 Switch Installation 2 Use a ratcheting torque flathead screwdriver to tighten the c
94. C 0 0 Fal 7 C 0 0 Fale 0 0 0 Table 36 Port Security Tab Fields Field Description Port The port on which you want to enable or disable security Enable Check the checkbox to enable port security MAC Addresses The number of supported dynamic or static MAC addresses Allowed 1 80 e Dynamic The number of MAC addresses devices currently connected to the port that are not manually statically defined e Static The number of MAC addresses devices statically defined by using the Device Manager Web interface Note that this number must be greater than the sum of the static dynamic for a given port If you wish to set the number to less disconnect the appropriate devices and let their entries in the port security table time out 206 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Port Status Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 The Port Status tab lets you monitor alarms statuses thresholds and bandwidth utilization You can also view port and cable diagnostics Port Configuration Smartports amp VLANs Port Thresholds Port Security Port Status DHCP Pool Display DHCP Address Assignment SD Flash Sync Sawe Fiestore hH L Part gia cc Port Fault Threshold Exceeded Bandwidth Status Unicast Multicast Broadcast Utilization Percent No till No alarms Active No Fault No Mo Gil 2 No alarms Inactive No Fault No No No Fa1 1 No alarms I
95. Chapter 5 e Io translate all of the addresses in the private subnet or a portion of the private subnet complete the fields as described in the table below Field Description Type of Entry Choose Subnet Starting Private lP Type the existing starting address for a device on the private subnet This address Address must correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Starting Private Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 or 192 168 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 32 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 16 Starting Public IP Type a unique starting public address to represent the devices This address must Address correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Starting Public Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE
96. D 2 RD 2 RD Figure 16 Four Twisted pair Crossover Cable Schematic Switch Switch 1 TPO 1 TPO 2 TPO 2 TPO 3 TP1 3 TPT 6 TP1 6 TP1 4 TP24 lt gt 4 TPH 5 TP2 lt gt 5 TPZ 7 TP3 lt gt 7 TP3 8 TP3 lt gt 8 TP3 Dual purpose Ports The Ethernet port on a dual purpose port uses standard RJ45 connectors The following figure shows the pinouts combo ports gue j Figure 17 Ethernet Port RJ45 Connector Pin Label 12345678 1 TPO 2 TPO 3 TP1 4 TP2 5 TP2 6 TP1 7 TP3 8 TP3 The SFP module slot on a dual purpose port uses SFP modules for fiber optic ports IMPORTANT The auto MDIX feature is enabled by default For configuration information for this feature see the switch software configuration guide or the switch command reference 276 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Console Ports Cables and Connectors Appendix C Console ports enable you to connect a switch to a computer if you use the Command line interface CLI to configure and monitor a switch Stratix 5700 Console Ports Stratix 5700 switches have two console ports e A USB 5 pin mini Type B port on the front panel e An RJ45 console port on the rear panel Only one console port can be active at one time The USB console port uses a USB Type A to 5 pin mini Type B cable The USB Typ
97. Default Display Valid Values Style PortFa1_ 13Utilization PortFa1_ 14Utilization PortFa1_ 15Utilization PortFa1_ 16Utilization PortFa1_ 17Utilization PortFa1_ 18Utilization PortGi1_1Utilization PortGi1_2Utilization MajorAlarmRelay MulticastGroupsActive AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_GB_MANAGED 0 0 AlarmRelay 0 Member Name Default Display Valid Values Style AllPortsDisabled PortFa1_ 1Disable PortFa1_ 2Disable PortFa1_3Disable PortFa1_ 4Disable PortFa1_5Disable PortFa1_6Disable PortFa1_ 7Disable PortFa1_8Disable PortFa1_9Disable PortFa1_ 10Disable PortFa1_ 11Disable PortFa1_ 12Disable PortFa1_ 13Disable PortFa1_ 14Disable PortFa1_ 15Disable PortFa1_ 16Disable PortFa1_ 17Disable PortFa1_ 18Disable PortGi1_ 1Disable PortGi1_ 2Disable Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 DisablePort 0 DisablePort 1 DisablePort 2 DisablePort 3 DisablePort 4 DisablePort 5 DisablePort 6 DisablePort 7 DisablePort 8 DisablePort 9 DisablePort 10 DisablePort 11 DisablePort 12 DisablePort 13 DisablePort 14 DisablePort 15 DisablePort 16 DisablePort 17 DisablePort 18 DisablePort 19 DisablePort 20 Appendix A 263 AppendixA Module defined Data Types Module defined Input Data AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Type 20 port switches Member Name Valid Values AnyPortConnected LinkStatus 0 PortFa1_ 1Connected LinkStatus 1 PortFa1_ 2Connected LinkStatus 2 PortFa1_ 3Connected LinkStatus 3 PortFa1_ 4Co
98. Device PortGi1_ 2UnauthorizedDevice AnyPortThreshold PortFa1_ 1Threshold PortFa1_ 2Threshold PortFa1_ 3Threshold PortFa1_ 4Threshold PortGi1_ 1Threshold PortGi1_ 2Threshold AllPortsUtilization PortFa1_ 1Utilization PortFa1_ 2Utilization PortFa1_ 3Utilization PortFa1_ 4Utilization PortGi1_1Utilization PortGi1_2Utilization MajorAlarmRelay MulticastGroupsActive Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 LinkStatus 0 LinkStatus 1 LinkStatus 2 LinkStatus 3 LinkStatus 4 LinkStatus 5 LinkStatus 6 UnauthorizedDevice 0 UnauthorizedDevice 1 UnauthorizedDevice 2 UnauthorizedDevice 3 UnauthorizedDevice 4 UnauthorizedDevice 5 UnauthorizedDevice 6 ThresholdExceeded 0 ThresholdExceeded 1 ThresholdExceeded 2 ThresholdExceeded 3 ThresholdExceeded 4 ThresholdExceeded 5 ThresholdExceeded 6 AlarmRelay 0 245 Appendix A Module defined Output Data Type 6 port Gb switches Module defined Input Data Module defined Data Types Type 6 port switches 246 AB STRATIX_5700_6PORT_GB_MANAGED 0 0 Member Name Default Display Style Valid Values AllPortsDisabled PortFa1_ 1Disable PortFa1_ 2Disable PortFa1_3Disable PortFa1_ 4Disable PortGi1_ 1Disable PortGi1_ 2Disable AB STRATIX_5700_6PORT_MANAGED 1 0 DisablePort 0 DisablePort 1 DisablePort 2 DisablePort 3 DisablePort 4 DisablePort 5 DisablePort 6 Member Name Default Display Valid Values Style AnyPortConnected PortFa1_ 1Connected PortFa1_ 2Co
99. Device 0 PortFa1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 1 PortFa1_2UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 2 PortFa1_ 3UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 3 PortFa1_4UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 4 PortFa1_ 5UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 5 PortFa1_ 6UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 6 PortFa1_7UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 7 PortFa1_ 8UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 8 PortGi1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 9 PortGi1_ 2UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 10 AnyPortThreshold ThresholdExceeded 0 PortFa1_ 1Threshold ThresholdExceeded 1 PortFa1_ 2Threshold ThresholdExceeded 2 PortFa1_ 3Threshold ThresholdExceeded 3 PortFa1_ 4Threshold ThresholdExceeded 4 PortFa1_5Threshold ThresholdExceeded 5 PortFa1_6Threshold ThresholdExceeded 6 PortFa1_7Threshold ThresholdExceeded 7 PortFa1_8Threshold ThresholdExceeded 8 PortGi1_ 1Threshold ThresholdExceeded 9 PortGi1_ 2Threshold ThresholdExceeded 10 AllPortsUtilization PortFa1_ 1Utilization PortFa1_ 2Utilization PortFa1_ 3Utilization PortFa1_ 4Utilization Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 249 AppendixA Module defined Data Types Module defined Output Data Type 10 port Gb switches Module defined Input Data Type 10 port switches 250 AB STRATIX_5700_10PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Valid Values PortFa1_ 5Utilization PortFa1_ 6Utilization PortFa1_ 7Utilization PortFa1_ 8Utilization PortGi1_1Utilization P
100. Disable PortFa1_ 4Disable PortFa1_5Disable PortFa1_ 6Disable AB STRATIX_5700_8PORT_MANAGED 1 0 DisablePort 0 DisablePort 1 DisablePort 2 DisablePort 3 DisablePort 4 DisablePort 5 DisablePort 6 Member Name Default Display Valid Values Style AnyPortConnected PortFa1_ 1Connected PortFa1_ 2Connected PortFa1_ 3Connected PortFa1_ 4Connected PortFa1_5Connected PortFa1_ 6Connected PortFa1_ 7Connected PortFa1_ 8Connected AnyPortUnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 2UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 3UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_4UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 5UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 6UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 7UnauthorizedDevice Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 LinkStatus 0 LinkStatus 1 LinkStatus 2 LinkStatus 3 LinkStatus 4 LinkStatus 5 LinkStatus 6 LinkStatus 5 LinkStatus 6 UnauthorizedDevice 0 UnauthorizedDevice 1 UnauthorizedDevice 2 UnauthorizedDevice 3 UnauthorizedDevice 4 UnauthorizedDevice 5 UnauthorizedDevice 6 UnauthorizedDevice 247 Appendix A AppendixA Module defined Data Types Module defined Output Data Type 8 port switches 248 AB STRATIX_5700_8PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Type Default Display Valid Values Style Member Name PortFa1_ 8UnauthorizedDevice AnyPortThreshold PortFa1_ 1Threshold PortFa1_2Threshold PortFa1_3Threshold PortFa1_4Threshold PortFa1_5Threshold PortFa1_6Threshold PortFa1_ Threshold PortFa1_8Threshold AllPortsUtil
101. Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards e Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment ATTENTION Make sure all connectors and caps are securely tightened to properly seal the connections against leaks and maintain IP enclosure type requirements ATTENTION The console ports are intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection The console port cables are not to exceed 3 0 m 9 84 ft and must not contain hubs Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 57 Chapter2 Switch Installation When determining where to place the switch observe these guidelines e Airflow around the switch is unrestricted To prevent the switch from overheating observe the following minimum clearances Top and bottom 50 8 mm 2 0 in Sides 50 8 mm 2 0 in Front 50 8 mm 2 0 in e For 10 100 ports and 10 100 1000 ports the cable length from a switch to an attached device cannot exceed 100 m 328 ft e The copper cable length from a switch to an attached device cannot exceed the distance specified in Appendix C e For maximum noise immunity X code shielded cables must be used on M12 uplink ports For recommended M12 media refer to http ab rockwellautomation com Connection Devices EtherNet Media e Temperature surrounding the unit does not exceed 60 C 140 F e Clearance to front and rear panels meets these conditions Front
102. E window e Limit the total power supported e Configure mode and power settings for individual ports For most applications the default configuration Auto mode is sufficient and no further configuration is required However you can customize the settings to meet your needs For example to give a PoE port higher power priority set the mode to Static and allocate the power to be used As another example to disallow high power devices on a port set the mode to Auto and specify a maximum power limit IMPORTANT When you make PoE configuration changes to a port the port drops power Whether the port powers up again depends on the new configuration the state of the other PoE ports and the state of the power budget For example if port 1 is in Auto mode and the On state and you configure it for Static mode the switch removes power from port 1 detects the powered device and repowers the port If port 1 is in Auto mode and the On state and you configure it with a maximum wattage of 10 W the switch removes power from the port and then redetects the powered device The switch repowers the port only if the powered device is a Class 1 Class 2 or a Cisco only powered device Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 201 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Fasa Auto elon oo 00 _ Eeee rent 0 w Total Pawer Used OW Remaining Power Available DW Refresh Communication Set e
103. Effective Private Addresses Displays the existing address for the device on the private subnet that is configured for translation If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid Effective Public Addresses Displays the unique public address to represent the device If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid e To translate a range of addresses for devices on the private subnet that need to communicate on the public subnet complete the fields below Field Description Type of Entry Choose Range Starting Private IP Address Type the existing starting address for the device on the private subnet Starting Public IP Address Type a unique starting public address to represent the devices Range Type the number of addresses to include in the range Valid values 1 128 Default value 1 IMPORTANT Each address in the range counts as one translation entry The switch supports a maximum of 128 translation entries Effective Private Addresses Displays the range of existing addresses for devices on the private subnet that are configured for translation If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid Effective Public Addresses Displays the range of unique public addresses to represent the devices If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid 222 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment
104. Ground the Switch O GG O a dw 62 Connect the Switch to a DC Power Source 64 Ware External Alarms 2 2 is42s GG ww dL EN 0 65 Connect to 10 100 and 10 100 1000 Ports 66 Connect to PoE POrts cu a ated che Suc dd DO 66 Set Up the Switch Initially with Express Setup 67 Chapter 3 Porc Numbering 0000252440083222 76 cp ie SS HUFEN NF 82 SA DOL i 350455 EE TE Ed FN NU GER OL 83 Optimize Ports through Smartports Port Rol s 83 Custom Smartport Roles se yR RO OS 83 Avoid Smiart port M ismate Neser rieien Fd dd y MDO 84 Power over Ethernet PoE si eia yu a OUD DY da GA 85 Powered Device Detection and Initial Power Allocation 86 Power Management Modes nsc renias 0022 aR R bhn 87 VLAN C AE E a a 4 HC RA 90 Isolate Traffic and WU Seis ui y GG y EAR 91 Isolate Different Tralfic Type uu GU c ees 92 Gioup USS a Gi A y O IG woe A OU AR 92 IGMP Snooping with Querfier accccccececesaaaaa 93 Spanning Tree Protocol ain Gw FR i a oY OR UNO 94 Port Flresholds sau eos Ga GU es tale UN GU AD DDO 95 Incoming storm control see Go ad GU ddo 95 O tg ing rate imig o Od Gn SN 96 Default Port Thresholds Configuration 96 PORE SECU UIC FE __ AY NHY y Dynamic Secure MAC Address MACID 97 Static Secure MAC Address MAC ID 98 Secur Vola SH
105. Grounding Guidelines ATTENTION For proper grounding you must always connect the power supply Use at least 4 mm 12 AWG wire to connect to the external grounding screw The ground lug is not supplied with the switch You can use one of the these options e Single ring terminal e Two single ring terminals To ground the switch to earth ground follow these steps Be sure to follow any grounding requirements at your site 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver or a ratcheting torque screwdriver with a Phillips head to remove the ground screw from the front panel of the switch Store the ground screw for later use 2 Use the manufacturer s guidelines to determine the wire length to be stripped 3 Insert the ground wire into the ring terminal lug and use a crimping tool to crimp the terminal to the wire If you are using two ring terminals repeat this action for the second ring terminal 32273 M 4 Slide the ground screw through the terminal Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 39 Chapter2 Switch Installation 5 Insert the ground screw into the functional ground screw opening on the front panel Ring Terminal Lug single lug shown 32276 M 6 Use a ratcheting torque screwdriver to tighten the ground screws and ring terminal lugs to the switch front panel to 0 4 Nem 3 5 lbein Do not exceed the recommended torque 7 Attach the other end of the ground wire to a grounded bare m
106. I O tree Its members are named in accordance with the port names You can disable a switch port by setting the corresponding bit in the output tag The output bits are applied every time the switch receives the output data from the controller when the controller is in Run mode When the controller is in Program mode the output bits are not applied The port is enabled if the corresponding output bit is 0 If you enable or disable a port by using the Device Manager Web interface or the CLI the port setting can be overridden by the output bits the next time they are applied The output bits always take precedence regardless of whether the Device Manager Web interface or CLI was used to enable or disable the port The tables in this appendix list module defined data types for Stratix 5700 switches The tables include information for input as indicated by an I and output as indicated by an O Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Module defined Input Data Type 6 port Gb switches Module defined Data Types Appendix A AB STRATIX_5700_6PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Default Display Valid Values Style AnyPortConnected PortFa1_ 1Connected PortFa1_ 2Connected PortFa1_ 3Connected PortFa1_ 4Connected PortGi1_ 1Connected PortGi1_ 2Connected AnyPortUnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_2UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 3UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 4UnauthorizedDevice PortGi1_ 1Unauthorized
107. Logix Designer application The following table shows the Smartport role and the maximum number of supported MAC IDs Table 6 Maximum Number of MAC IDs per Smartport Role Smartport Role Number of MAC IDs max Automation Device 1 Desktop for Automation 1 Switch for Automation Not restricted Router for Automation Not restricted Phone for Automation 3 Wireless for Automation Not restricted Multiport Automation Devices Not restricted Virtual Desktop for Automation 2 Port Mirroring Not restricted None Not restricted Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 97 Chapter3 Switch Software Features EtherChannels 98 Static Secure MAC Address MAC ID The other method of limiting MAC IDs is to statically configure one or more MAC IDs for a port by defining them via port security on the Device Manager Web interface These addresses become part of the saved configuration of the switch This method provides strong security However if you replace any devices connected to the port you must reconfigure the MAC IDs because the new devices have different MAC IDs than the previous devices Security Violations It is a security violation when one of these situations occurs e The maximum number of secure MAC addresses that have been configured for a port have been added to the address table and a station whose MAC address is not in the address table attempts to access the interface e An address learned or con
108. Logix Designer application is the rebranding of RSLogix 5000 software and will continue to be the product to program Logix5000 controllers for discrete process batch motion safety and drive based solutions Rockwell Software Studio 5000 Rockwell Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Copyright 2014 Rockwell Automation Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved This program is protected by U S and International copyright laws The Studio 5000 environment is the foundation for the future of Rockwell Automation engineering design tools and capabilities The Studio 5000 environment is the one place for design engineers to develop all of the elements of their control system Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 11 Preface Access Product Release Notes Product release notes are available online within the Product Compatibility and Download Center 1 From the Ouick Links list on http www ab com choose Product Compatibility and Download Center Quick Links k s gt Rockwell Automation World Product Directory Rockwell i x Search Product Catalogs Automation STEN THINK SOLVE Products amp Technologies Solutions amp Services News amp Innovation Training amp Events Sales amp Partners Support About Product Certifications tos Home Support Product Resources Product Compatibility amp Download Center t Product News Product Configurat
109. M004E EN P June 2014 67 Chapter2 Switch Installation To run Express Setup follow these steps 1 Make sure that at least one switch Ethernet port is available for Express Setup IMPORTANT _ For 1783 BMS4S2SGL or 1783 BMS4S2SGA switches you must use port Gi1 1 for Express Setup Do not use the console port During Express Setup the switch acts as a DHCP server If your personal computer has a static IP address change your personal computer settings before you begin to temporarily use DHCP 2 Apply power to the switch When the switch powers on it begins its power on sequence The power on sequence takes approximately 60 seconds to complete 3 Make sure that the power on sequence has completed by verifying that the EIP Mod and Setup status indicators are flashing green If the switch fails the power on sequence the EIP Mod status indicator turns red 68 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 4 Press and release the Express Setup button Wait for a few seconds until the status indicator on one of the unconnected switch ports flashes green This button is recessed 16 mm 0 63 in behind the panel Use a small tool such as a paper clip to reach the button Stratix 5700 Express Setup Button Express Setup Button
110. OOL PortFa1_ 4UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_5UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_6UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 7UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_8UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_9UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 10UnauthorizedDevice BOOL AnyPortThreshold BOOL PortFa1_ Threshold BOOL PortFa1_2Threshold BOOL PortFa1_3Threshold BOOL PortFa1_4Threshold BOOL PortFa1_5Threshold BOOL PortFa1_6Threshold BOOL PortFa1_7Threshold BOOL PortFa1_8Threshold BOOL PortFa1_9Threshold BOOL PortFa1_ 10Threshold BOOL AllPortsUtilization SINT PortFa1_ 1Utilization SINT PortFa1_2Utilization SINT PortFa1_3Utilization SINT PortFa1_4Utilization SINT PortFa1_5Utilization SINT PortFa1_6Utilization SINT PortFa1_7Utilization SINT PortFa1_8Utilization SINT PortFa1_9Utilization SINT PortFa1_ 10Utilization SINT MajorAlarmRelay BOOL MulticastGroupsActive DINT Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 1 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 2 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 3 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 4 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 5 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 6 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 7 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 8 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 9 Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 10 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 0 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 1 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 2 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 3 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 4 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 5 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 6 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 7 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 8 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 9 Decimal ThresholdExceeded 10 Decim
111. Organizing a network around these factors helps to define the size and membership of the VLANs in the network Figure 1 VLAN Example Network WAN Internet Management Access i Router with Firewall Mn mm a s a NS bM Eu G Eu a GU 2 a HE a EU db e h Cac oS aa Guest Guest 7 E le a Ee _ VLAN 7 VLAN 9 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 91 Chapter 3 92 Switch Software Features Isolate Different Traffic Types Isolating data traffic from delay sensitive traffic such as voice traffic increases the guality of the voice transmission In the figure above switch ports connected to the IP phones belong to VLAN 3 a VLAN that is configured to provide Voice over IP VoIP services on these connections meaning priority is given to voice traffic over regular IP data traffic Voice traffic from the phone and IP phone service requests to an IP PBX server have priority over traffic from the desktop devices attached to the IP phones To further isolate data traffic from voice traffic the data traffic from the attached desktop devices can be assigned to a separate VLAN Group Users The network shown in Figure 1 provides access to three types of network users e Wired employees e Wireless employees e Wired or wireless company visitors Each user type requires different access levels to the company network VLANs and security policies on a router o
112. P module Disconnect all cables before removing or installing an SFP module ATTENTION Use only Rockwell 1783 SFP100FX 1783 SFP100LX IMPORTANT Installing and removing an SFP module can shorten its useful life Do not remove and insert SFP modules more often than is absolutely necessary On switch catalog numbers that support communication over fiber optic cable SFP modules are inserted into SFP module slots on the front of the switch These field replaceable modules provide the uplink optical interfaces send TX and receive RX 46 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 You can use any combination of rugged SFP modules Each SFP module must be of the same type as the SFP module on the other end of the cable The cable must not exceed the stipulated cable length for reliable communications When you use commercial SFP modules such as CWDM and 1000BX U D reduce the maximum operating temperature by 15 C 59 F The minimum operating temperature is 0 C 32 F For detailed instructions on installing removing and cabling the SFP module see your SFP module documentation To insert an SFP module into the SFP module slot follow these steps 1 Attach an ESD preventive wrist strap to your wrist and to a grounded bare metal surface 2 Grasp both sides of the SFP module and align the module sideways in front of the slot opening ATTENTION If the SFP module cannot b
113. Port Statistics Ll OD OM CIE Port Fal 1 Fal 2 Fal 3 Fal 4 Fal 5 Fal 6 Transmit Detail Transmitted 33764761 30140537 Receive Detail Total Transmitted pack 96559 1 255358 Data unit Byte MB Received Total Received pack Total Transmit Error Total Receive Errors pa Last Counter Reset 44484571 439844 never never never never never 7529823 71567 0 never The types of port statistics collected and displayed are grouped under these tabs on the Port Statistics window on the Device Manager Web interface Overview tab Use this tab to display the specific numbers of error packets received on and sent from the port which is a level of detail that is not available from the Dashboard graphs The number of error packets can mean a duplex mismatch incompatibilities with the port and its attached device or faulty cables or attached devices Any of these problems can cause slow network performance data loss or lack of connectivity Transmit Detail tab Use this tab to troubleshoot unusual changes in network traffic This tab displays these statistics Unicast multicast and broadcast packets sent from each port Detailed statistics of errors sent to each port If a port is sending an unusually high amount of traffic such as multicast or broadcast packets monitor the connected device to see if this traf
114. S06TA 6 port 6 Ethernet ports managed switch full firmware 1 Fa1 1 2 Fa1 2 3 Fa1 3 4 Fa1 4 5 Fa1 5 6 Fa1 6 1783 BMS06SGL 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 SFP Gigabit slots managed switch lite 1 Fa1 1 firmware 2 Fa1 2 3 Fa1 3 4 Fa1 4 1 Gi1 1 2 Gi1 2 1783 BM06SGA 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 SFP Gigabit slots managed switch full 1 Fa1 1 firmware 2 Fa1 2 3 Fa1 3 4 Fa1 4 1 Gi1 1 2 Gi1 2 1783 BMS06TGL 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 Gigabit ports managed switch full 1 Fa1 1 firmware 2 Fa1 2 3 Fa1 3 4 Fa1 4 1 Gi1 1 2 Gi1 2 76 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Table 3 Port Numbering continued Cat No 1783 BMS06TGA 1783 BMS10CL 1783 BMS10CA 1783 BMS10CGL 1783 BMS10CGA Port Numbering on Switch Labels Port Numbering in config text File 6 port 4 Ethernet ports 2 Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo ports managed switch lite firmware 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo ports managed switch full firmware 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch lite firmware 10 port 8 Ethernet ports 2 combo Gigabit ports managed switch full firmware C le ee noe o Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Software Features Fa1 1 Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 Fa1 1 Fal 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Fa1 1 Fal 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7
115. Smartport Roles Stratix 5700 switches let you create and modify as many as 10 custom Smartport roles for a variety of custom applications You can import or export custom Smartport roles only if you are using Mozilla Firefox Web browser version 3 6 or higher By default the switch ports are set to the None port role Description Apply this role to ports to be connected to EtherNet IP Ethernet Industrial Protocol devices It can be used for industrial automation devices such as logic controllers and 1 0 e Portis set to Access mode e Port security supports only one MAC ID e Optimize queue management for CIP traffic Apply this role to ports connected to multiport EtherNet IP devices such as multiport EtherNet IP devices arranged in a linear or daisy chain topology the 1783 ETAP module for connection to only the device port unmanaged switches such as the Stratix 2000 and managed switches with Remote Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP disabled e Portis set to Access mode e No port security e Optimized queue management for CIP traffic Apply this role to ports to be connected to desktop devices such as desktop computers workstations notebook computers and other client based hosts e Portis set to Access mode e Portfast enabled e Port security supports only one MAC ID Do not apply to ports to be connected to switches routers or access points Apply this role to ports connected to computers running virtualization
116. ULK FILE MIB CISCO CABLE DIAG MIB CISCO CALLHOME MIB CISCO CAR MIB CISCO CDP MIB CISCO CIRCUIT INTERFACE MIB CISCO CLUSTER MIB CISCO CONFIG COPY MIB CISCO CONFIG MAN MIB CISCO DATA COLLECTION MIB CISCO DHCP SNOOPING MIB CISCO EMBEDDED EVENT MGR MIB CISCO ENTITY ALARM MIB CISCO ENTITY VENDORTYPE OID MIB CISCO ENVMON MIB CISCO ERR DISABLE MIB CISCO FLASH MIB CISCO FTP CLIENT MIB CISCO IF EXTENSION MIB CISCO IGMP FILTER MIB CISCO IMAGE MIB CISCO IP STAT MIB CISCO LAG MIB CISCO LICENSE MGMT MIB CISCO MAC AUTH BYPASS MIB CISCO MAC NOTIFICATION MIB 112 Supported MIBs The Stratix 5700 switch supports the following MIBs CISCO MEMORY POOL MIB CISCO PAE MIB CISCO PAGP MIB CISCO PING MIB CISCO PORT OOS MIB CISCO PORT SECURITY MIB CISCO PORT STORM CONTROL MIB CISCO PRIVATE VLAN MIB CISCO PROCESS MIB CISCO PRODUCTS MIB CISCO RESILIENT ETHERNET PROTOCOL MIB CISCO RTTMON ICMP MIB CISCO RTTMON IP EXT MIB CISCO RTTMON MIB CISCO RTTMON RTP MIB CISCO SNMP TARGET EXT MIB CISCO STACK MIB CISCO STACKMAKER MIB CISCO STP EXTENSIONS MIB CISCO SYSLOG MIB CISCO TCP MIB CISCO UDLDP MIB CISCO VLAN IFTABLE RELATIONSHIP MIB CISCO VLAN MEMBERSHIP MIB CISCO VTP MIB ENTITY MIB ETHERLIKE MIB HC RMON MIB IEEE8021 PAE MIB IEEE8023 LAG MIB IF MIB IP FORWARD MIB IP MIB LLDP EXT MED MIB LLDP MIB NETRANGER NOTIFICATION LOG MIB OLD CISCO CHASSIS MIB OLD CISCO CPU MIB OLD CISCO FLASH MIB OLD CISCO INTERFACES MIB OLD CISCO IP MI
117. UM004E EN P June 2014 Module defined Data Types Appendix A AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Valid Values PortFal_17UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 17 PortFa1_ 18UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 18 PortFa1_ 19UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 19 PortFa1_ 20UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 20 AnyPortThreshold ThresholdExceeded 0 PortFa1_ 1Threshold ThresholdExceeded 1 PortFa1_ 2Threshold ThresholdExceeded 2 PortFa1_ 3Threshold ThresholdExceeded 3 PortFa1_ 4Threshold ThresholdExceeded 4 PortFa1_5Threshold ThresholdExceeded 5 PortFa1_6Threshold ThresholdExceeded 6 PortFa1_ 7Threshold ThresholdExceeded 7 PortFa1_ 8Threshold ThresholdExceeded 8 PortFa1_ 9Threshold ThresholdExceeded 9 PortFa1_ 10Threshold ThresholdExceeded 10 PortFa1_11Threshold ThresholdExceeded 11 PortFa1_ 12Threshold ThresholdExceeded 12 PortFa1_ 13Threshold ThresholdExceeded 13 PortFa1_ 14Threshold ThresholdExceeded 14 PortFa1_ 15Threshold ThresholdExceeded 15 PortFa1_ 16Threshold ThresholdExceeded 16 PortFa1_ 17Threshold ThresholdExceeded 17 PortFa1_ 18Threshold ThresholdExceeded 18 PortFa1_ 19Threshold ThresholdExceeded 19 PortFa1_20Threshold ThresholdExceeded 20 AllPortsUtilization PortFa1_ 1Utilization PortFa1_ 2Utilization PortFa1_ 3Utilization PortFa1_ 4Utilization PortFa1_ 5Utilization PortFa1_ 6Utilization PortFa1_ 7Utilization PortFa1_ 8Utilization PortFa1_ 9Utilization PortFa1_ 10Utilization PortFa1_ 11Utilizat
118. UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 9 PortFa1_ 10UnauthorizedDevice BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 10 PortFa1_ 11UnauthorizedDevice BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 11 PortFa1_ 12UnauthorizedDevice BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 12 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 267 Appendix A 268 Module defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_24PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name PortFa1_ 13UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 14UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 15UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 16UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 17UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 18UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 19UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_20UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_21UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_22UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_23UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_24UnauthorizedDevice AnyPortThreshold PortFa1_ 1Threshold PortFa1_2Threshold PortFa1_3Threshold PortFa1_4Threshold PortFa1_5Threshold PortFa1_6Threshold PortFa1_7Threshold PortFa1_8Threshold PortFa1_9Threshold PortFa1_ 10Threshold PortFa1_ 11Threshold PortFa1_ 12Threshold PortFa1_ 13Threshold PortFa1_ 14Threshold PortFa1_ 15Threshold PortFa1_ 16Threshold PortFa1_ 17Threshold PortFa1_ 18Threshold PortFa1_ 19Threshold PortFa1_20Threshold PortFa1_21Threshold PortFa1_22Threshold PortFa1_23Threshold PortFa1_24Threshold AllPortsUtilization PortFa1_ 1Utilization Default Display Style Valid Values BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 13 BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 14 BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 15 BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 16 BOOL Unauthoriz
119. Unicast Traffic Multicast Traffic IGMP Traffic Table 19 NAT Global Statistics Field Description Current Active Translations The number of IP addresses that have been translated within the last 90 seconds across all NAT instances Total Translations The total number of translations across all NAT instances Total NAT Translated Packets The total number of packets across all NAT instances Total Dropped Packets The total number of packets that have been dropped across all NAT instances 172 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Monitor REP Topology Table 20 Instance Statistics Field Selected Instance Current Active Translations Total NAT Translated Packets Total Dropped Packets Total Private to Public Address Translations Total Public to Private Address Translations Total Translations ARP Fixup ICMP Fixup Total Fixups Non Translated Unicast Traffic Multicast Traffic IGMP Traffic Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Description From the pull down menu choose the instance for which to view Statistics The number of translations that have occurred within the last 90 seconds for the instance The total number of packets that have been translated for the instance The total number of packets that have been dropped for the instance The total number of translations configured for devices on the private subnet The total number of trans
120. User Manual B su Allen Bradley Stratix 5700 Ethernet Managed Switches i Tq Une Ur cy jG na TEE ATIE p Vf 1 t ed S n a 1 v 4 I 427 We 87 ee lt 7 dM s ge gg te mr ee n vi Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation configuration and operation of this eguipment before you install configure operate or maintain this product Users are reguired to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to reguirements of all applicable codes laws and standards Activities including installation adjustments putting into service use assembly disassembly and maintenance are reguired to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice If this eguipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the eguipment may be impaired In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liabi
121. V DC 0 5 A The three remaining connections for the Form C output alarm circuit are as follows e NO output e NC output e common An alarm output and the common wiring connection are required to complete a single output alarm circuit The Form C output alarm relay provides one NO and one NC dry contact and CSA rated style 1007 or 1569 twisted pair copper appliance wiring ATTENTION Wire connections to the power and relay connector must be UL material AWM wire Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 49 Chapter2 Switch Installation The labels for the alarm relay connector are on the switch panel Table 1 Alarm Relay Connector Labels Label Connection NO Alarm Output Normally Open NO connection COM Alarm Output Common connection NC Alarm Output Normally Closed NC connection IN2 Alarm Input 2 REF Alarm Input Reference Ground connection IN1 Alarm Input 1 To wire the switch to an external alarm device follow these steps 1 Loosen the captive screws that hold the alarm relay connector on the switch and remove the connector from the switch chassis 32287 M 2 Measure two strands of twisted pair wire 18 20 AWG long enough to connect to the external alarm device Choose between setting up an external alarm input or output circuit 3 Use a wire stripper to remove the casing from both ends of each wire to 6 3 mm 0 25 in 0 5 mm 0 02 in Do not strip more than
122. While the Input data on this connection can be shared via multicast by multiple controllers only one controller can own the Output data If a second controller attempts to open this connection the connection is rejected IMPORTANT Because the output data is sent cyclically by the controller it overrides any other attempt to enable or disable a port from other software tools or visualization stations Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 RSLinx Software and Network Who Support The EtherNet IP network interface also supports the List Identity command used by CIP based network tools such as the RSLinx software RSWho function RSWho enables you to locate and identify your switch on the network by using the electronic data sheet EDS files Io access the RSWho function from the RSLinx software toolbar choose Communications gt RSWho IMPORTANT After using the RSWho function if you access the switch and view the Ethernet link counters you see the counts for only the first port Port Gi1 1 Electronic Data Sheet EDS Files Electronic Data Sheet EDS files are simple text files used by network configuration tools such as RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software to help you identify products and easily commission them on a network EDS files contain details about the readable and configurable parameters of the device They also provide informati
123. a the Studio 5000 Environment Configure Traffic Permits and Fixups Use caution when configuring traffic permits and fixups We recommend you use the default values To configure traffic permits or packet fixups follow these steps 1 Click the Advanced tab uee e d General Publicto Private Advanced Non Translated Addresses Blocked Blocked Multicast Blocked Blocked w Blocked r Blocked Refresh Communication e 2 In the Traffic Permits grid choose one of these options for incoming and outgoing packets that are not handled by NAT e Pass Through Permit the packets to pass across the NAT boundary e Blocked Drop the packets 3 In the Fix up Packets area check or clear the checkboxes to enable or disable protocol fixups for ARP and ICMP By default fixups are enabled for both ARP and ICMP 228 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 NAT Diagnostics Public Subnet Address Private Subnet Address Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 View Address Translations in RSLinx Software The Ethernet driver in RSLinx software supports devices with address translations If a device s address is configured for translation its public subnet address appears on the main dialog box of RSLinx sofware However its private subnet address appears in the device s configuration properties Figure 9 Public and Private Subnet A
124. ab Choose a macro icon CS1 to S10 Displays the VLAN ID and name e VLAN ID The unique identifier in a range of 2 4094 1002 1005 reserved for a VLAN you create by clicking Add New VLAN VLAN ID 1 is the default e Name rThe unique name for the VLAN 20 characters maximum you create by clicking Add New VLAN Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Port Thresholds Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 You can configure threshold limits for broadcast unicast and mulcicast traffic for each active port on the Port Thresholds tab This feature is available only with Full firmware The number of packets being sent is compared against the threshold value These limits help to prevent a single device from sending too much traffic For more information about this feature see Port Thresholds on page 95 General Connection Module Info Switch Configuration Switch Status Port Configuration Smartports amp VLANs Port Thresholds Port Security Port Status DHCF 41 Incoming Threshold Settings Outgoing Threshold Settings Port Unicast Multicast Broadcast All Traffic Enable Threshold L Units JEL Threshold Units reig Threshold Units a Threshold Units GHA Gi1 2 E YL 100 or o Fan El sl O a 1000 bps sll T Fat 2 xl O xd D E I 50 Fals xl O wo vl oO E Fat a xl O xd xl O E Fats ad E
125. able pinout four twisted pair 1000BASE T ports 276 cryptographic software SSL 111 customization DHCP persistence 139 DHCP server 137 IP address DHCP IP address pool 138 139 switch port 141 IP address for connected devices 137 139 IP address switch port 139 Smartport roles 83 D DC power connecting to 35 40 60 64 default gateway NAT 101 156 220 default router 139 default VLAN 90 126 delay request interval 147 denial of service attack 95 Device Manager access Web interface 118 hardware requirements 26 overview 26 software requirements 26 troubleshoot 236 287 Index 288 DHCP address assignment 212 IP address pool 138 persistence 139 pool display 210 server 100 troubleshoot 235 Direct Managed mode 237 DNS server1 and 2 139 domain name 139 dual purpose ports connectors and cables 276 duplex troubleshooting 237 Duplex mode default 133 setting 133 E electrical noise avoiding 32 58 electrostatic discharge 36 57 End to end Transparent mode 145 EtherChannels creating 135 deleting 135 modifying 135 EtherNet IP protocol 83 174 204 F firmware upgrade troubleshoot 241 front panel clearance 32 58 Full duplex mode 133 functional ground lug warning 39 62 G grounding procedures 38 40 62 63 Half duplex mode 133 hardware features 22 hardware requirements Device Manager Web interface 26 IEEE power classifications 86 IGMP snooping and address aliasing
126. able IOS image from the chosen source to the chosen destination This process takes approximately five minutes to complete If other files such as backup configurations are present on the SD card they are not synchronized know which way to synchronize Device Manager provides this information on the SD Card Sync tab You can overwrite your desired configuration if you synchronize in the wrong direction ATTENTION When synchronizing be aware of your start up source so that you 24 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Memory Allocation About the Switches Chapter 1 The following table provides details on default memory allocation for the switches You can use SDM templates to configure system resources in the switch to optimize support for specific features depending on how the switch is used in the network You can select a template to provide maximum system usage for some functions for example use the default template to balance resources and use access template to obtain maximum ACL usage To allocate hardware resources for different usages the switch SDM templates prioritize system resources to optimize support for certain features The following SDM Templates are available e Default e Routing e Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Consider using the routing template if you enable static routing or if you have more than 180 IGMP groups or multicast routes Consider using the Dual IPv4 and IPv6 templa
127. address and your network uses a DHCP server be sure that the IP address that you give to the switch is not within the range of addresses that the DHCP server automatically assigns to other devices This prevents IP address conflicts between the switch and another device 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Field IP Address Default Gateway optional NTP Server CIP VLAN IP Address Same As Management VLAN Telnet CIP and Enable Password optional Confirm Password Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Description The IP address and associated subnet mask are unique identifiers for the switch in a network e The IP address format is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be from 0 255 e The subnet mask is the network address that identifies the subnetwork subnet to which the switch belongs Subnets are used to segment the devices in a network into smaller groups The default is 255 255 255 0 This field is enabled only if the IP Assignment mode is Static Make sure that the IP address that you assign to the switch is not being used by another device in your network The IP address and the default gateway cannot be the same The IP address for the default gateway A gateway is a router or a dedicated network device that enables the switch to communicate with devices in other networks or subnetworks The default gatew
128. age from onboard flash to SD card Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 o File Management Sync Manual Sync Configuration Auto Sync o Prompt to Sync Manual Sync Image IOS Auto Sync After firmware upgrade a Prompt to Sync After firmware upgrade Manual Sync Table 26 Auto Sync Tab Fields Field Description Configuration Auto Sync Automatically synchronize the configuration when a configuration change is made in the Device Manager Web interface This is the default configuration Prompt to Sync After a user has submitted a configuration change the user is prompted with a message asking to confirm the synchronization Manual Sync No synchronization occurs on a configuration change unless the user performs a sync manually Image IOS Auto Sync After firmware upgrade Automatically sync the changed configuration when firmware is upgraded Prompt to Sync After upgrade After firmware is upgraded the user is prompted with a message asking to confirm the configuration This is the default configuration Manual Sync No synchronization occurs after firmware is upgraded unless the user performs a sync manually Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 185 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Upload and Download To cory a configuration 7 2 a file on a a
129. ailed to establish a new connection for reasons such as insufficient memory The number of Forward Close requests that failed for reasons such as incompatible electronic keying The number of Forward Open requests that failed for reasons such as incompatible electronic keying The number of CIP connections that timed out due to inactivity Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 175 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Diagnose Cabling Problems Use the Diagnostics window to run the Broken Wire Detection test which uses Time Domain Reflectometry TDR detection to identify diagnose and resolve cabling problems TDR detection is supported on copper Ethernet 10 100 and 10 100 1000 ports TDR is not supported on small form factor pluggable SFP module ports The link test can interrupt traffic between the port and the connected device Only run the test on a port that has a suspected problem Before running the link test use the Front Panel view the Port Status and the Port Statistics windows to gather information about a potential problem IMPORTANT Toruna valid test on gigabit ports you must first configure the gigabit port as an RJ45 media type as described in Configure Port Settings on page 132 To diagnose cabling from the Monitor menu choose Diagnostics To run a test select a port and then click Start lt Troubleshoot Diagnostics Link test enables you to remotely ide
130. al Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal AlarmRelay 0 Binary Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 251 AppendixA Module defined Data Types Module defined Output Data Type 10 port switches Module defined Input Data Type 16 port switches 252 AB STRATIX_5700_10PORT_MANAGED 0 0 Member Name Default Display Style Valid Values AllPortsDisabled PortFa1_ 1Disable PortFa1_ 2Disable PortFa1_3Disable PortFa1_ 4Disable PortFa1_5Disable PortFa1_6Disable PortFa1_ 7Disable PortFa1_8Disable PortFa1_9Disable PortFa1_ 10Disable AB STRATIX_5700_16PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Type Fault DINT AnyPortConnected BOOL PortFa1_ 1Connected BOOL PortFa1_2Connected BOOL PortFa1_3Connected BOOL PortFa1_4Connected BOOL PortFa1_5Connected BOOL PortFa1_6Connected BOOL PortFa1_7Connected BOOL PortFa1_8Connected BOOL PortFa1_9Connected BOOL PortFa1_ 10Connected BOOL PortFa1_11Connected BOOL PortFa1_12Connected BOOL PortFa1_13Connected BOOL PortFa1_ 14Connected BOOL PortFa1_15Connected BOOL PortFa1_16Connected BOOL AnyPortUnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 2UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_3UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 4UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_5UnauthorizedDevice BOOL Binary Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 DisablePort 0 DisablePort 1 DisablePort 2 DisablePort
131. anage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface 2 Choose one of these options for incoming and outgoing packets that are not handled by NAT e Pass through Permit the packets to pass across the NAT boundary e Blocked Drop the packets 3 In the Fix up Packets area check or clear the checkboxes to enable or disable fixups for ARP and ICMP By default fixups are enabled for both ARP and ICMP 4 Click Submit Configure Port Secu rity Configure port security to limit the MAC addresses MAC IDs that can access a given port Port security is based on the number of MAC addresses supported none of which are statically defined Static port security lets you specify whether MAC addresses are auto learned or manually defined To configure port security from the Configure menu choose Port Security o Security Port Security Port Security Table F Edit Port Name Enable Maximum MAC Count Allowed Dynamic Static O Fal 1 false 1 4 0 O Fal false 1 CJ Fal 3 false 1 O Fal 4 false 1 0 CO Fal 5 false 1 0 iA Fal 6 false 1 0 Port security limits and identifies the MAC addresses of devices that can send traffic through the switch port The switch port does not forward traffic from devices outside the defined group of devices A security violation occurs when any of the following conditions occur e A device which has a MAC address different from any identified secure MAC addresses attempts to access the
132. ange the total power supported to an appropriate value and then change the power supply Displays the amount of power the module is currently using Displays the amount of unused power available to the module Displays the port number Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 143 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Table 15 Power Management Fields Field Mode Status Power Watts Max Power Watts Override Power Watts Device Class 144 Description Displays the Power Management mode of the port e Auto Enables the detection of powered devices and automatically allocates power to the PoE port if a device is connected This setting is selected by default To limit the power used by this port adjust the Max Power setting e Static Reserves power for this port even when no device is connected to make sure that power is provided upon device detection You can also choose Static mode to prioritize a port The switch allocates power to Static mode ports before it allocates power to Auto mode ports e Off PoE is disabled For more information see Power Management Modes on page 87 Displays whether PoE is enabled on or disabled off on the port Displays the amount of power allocated to the port Displays the maximum amount of power available to the port PoE ports 4 15 4 W PoE ports 4 30 W Indicates the power override configured for the port This con
133. aptive screws on the sides of the power connectors 32284 M When you are testing the switch one power source is sufficient If you are installing the switch and are using a second power source repeat this procedure for the second power connector Pwr B which installs just below the primary power connector Pwr A 3 When you are installing the switch secure the wires coming from the power connectors to the rack by using tie wraps Wire the Power over Ethernet DC Power Source This procedure applies only to switches with PoE ports N WARNING The console port is intended only for temporary local programming purposes and not intended for permanent connection If you connect or disconnect the console cable with power applied to this module or the programming device on the other end of the cable an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding ATTENTION To comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive LVD this eguipment must be powered from a source compliant with the safety extra low voltage SELV or protected extra low voltage PELV To comply with UL restrictions this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with Class 2 or Limited Voltage Current The switch must be wired and grounded 44 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation
134. are troubleshooting a connectivity problem you can change this setting to see if the switch port and connected device have a speed mismatch The Duplex mode of the switch port e Auto autonegotiation if the connected device can negotiate with the switch e Full Full duplex mode if both devices can send data at the same time e Half Half duplex mode if one or both devices cannot send data at the same time The default is Auto On Gigabit Ethernet ports you cannot set the port to Half duplex mode if the port speed is set to Auto We recommend that you use the default so that the duplex setting on the switch port automatically matches the setting on the connected device Change the Duplex mode on the switch port if the connected device reguires a specific mode An example of when to change this setting is during troubleshooting If you are troubleshooting a connectivity problem you can change this setting to verify if the switch port and connected device have a duplex mismatch Whether the automatic medium dependent interface crossover auto MDIX feature can automatically detect the required cable connection type straight through or crossover and configure the connection appropriately The default is Enable This setting is not available on the SFP module ports The active port type either the RJ45 port or the SFP module port of a dual purpose uplink port By default the switch detects whether the RJ45 port or SFP module port of a
135. ary edge ports and may have secondary ports to use when a primary port fails You can specify preferred primary and secondary ports Configuring a port as preferred does not guarantee that it becomes the alternate port but gives it a slight edge among equal contenders You also can indicate that a port is connected to switches that do not support REP Choose one of these port types e Edge A secondary edge port that participates in VLAN load balancing e Edge no neighbor A secondary edge port that is connected to a non REP switch Edge no neighbor preferred A secondary edge port that is connected to a non REP switch and is the preferred alternate port for VLAN load balancing e Edgeno neighbor primary A secondary edge port that always participates in VLAN load balancing in this REP segment and is connected to a non REP switch Edge no neighbor primary preferred An edge port that always participates in VLAN load balancing in this REP segment is connected to a non REP switch and is the preferred port for VLAN load balancing e Edge preferred A secondary edge port that is the preferred alternate port for VLAN load balancing e Edge primary An edge port that always participates in VLAN load balancing in this REP segment e Edge primary preferred An edge port that always participates in VLAN load balancing in this REP segment and is the preferred port for VLAN load balancing e None This port is not part of the REP segment Th
136. as a P h to the onboard memory enter the directory name of the folder on the switch browse to Configuration Files select the file and click Upload To download a configuration file from the onboard memory to your computer right click the link and choose Save Link As o File Management Load Save Booted From Internal Flash v upload a file to device Directory to be put flash Browse v Download configuration files from booting device Please use save as otherwise it may be a cached version you may have to modify the file name config text vlan dat dmuser txt Upgrade License Files After obtaining a license file use the License Upgrade window to install it on the switch 1 Click Browse to select the license file 2 Click Upgrade License to begin the upgrade process Messages appear to indicate the progress Once the upgrade is complete the switch restarts o File Management License Upgrade License Level LITE Default No valid license found Upload the license file Browse _ Upgrade License 186 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Chapter 5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Topic Page EtherNet IP CIP Interface 188 Add a Switch to the 1 0 Configuration Tree 191 Configure General Properties 192 Connection Properties 195 Module Information 196 Switch Configuration Properties 197 Switch Status 199 Port Configuration 200
137. ast IP addresses used by the EtherNet IP network for I O traffic are learned by the switch IGMP implementation in the switch is IGMP V2 This version is backward compatible with switches running IGMP V1 The switch has a built in querier function and the global macro enables on IGMP Snooping and the querier Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 93 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Spanning Tree Protocol 94 Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a Layer 2 link management protocol that provides path redundancy while preventing loops in the network For a Layer 2 Ethernet network to function properly only one active path can exist between any two stations Multiple active paths among end stations cause loops in the network If a loop exists in the network end stations can receive duplicate messages Switches can also learn end station MAC addresses on multiple Layer 2 interfaces These conditions result in an unstable network Spanning tree operation is transparent to end stations which cannot detect whether they are connected to a single LAN segment or a switched LAN of multiple segments The STP uses a spanning tree algorithm to select one switch of a redundantly connected network as the root of the spanning tree The algorithm calculates the best loop free path through a switched Layer 2 network by assigning a role to each port based on the role of the port in the active topology e Root A forwarding port elected
138. ated with a VLAN that is or is not assigned to a NAT instance e If its associated VLAN is assigned to a NAT instance the management interface resides on the private subnet by default To manage the switch from the private subnet no additional configuration is reguired Io manage the switch from the public subnet you must configure a private to public translation e If its associated VLAN is not assigned to a NAT instance the management interface s traffic remains untranslated and is always permitted to pass through the port Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 105 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Configuration Considerations Consider these guidelines and limitations when configuring NAT e A switch can translate only IPv4 addresses e A switch can have a maximum of 128 NAT instances 128 NAT associated VLANs and 128 translation entries A subnet translation counts as only one translation entry but includes translations for many devices e You can configure NAT on one or both uplink ports of the switch IMPORTANT Some NAT configurations can result in greater than expected traffic loads on both private and public subnets Also unintended traffic can be visible NAT is not a substitute for a firewall Make sure your configuration is performance qualified prior to use in a production environment Ports configured for NAT do not support the following across the NAT boundary due to embedded IP addr
139. ation Switch Status Port Configuration Smartports amp MLANz Port Thresholds Port Security Port Status DHCF lt gt IP Settings 9 Manually Configure IF settings O Obtain IF settings automatically using DHCP IP Settings Contiguration IF Address iD BR 84 248 Subnet Mask 255 255 240 g 0 Gateway Address ji 0 0 0 0 Domain Name P 0 0 0 0 Host Hame i Secondary DNS i j z Switch Server Address i A Administration Contact Spanning Tree Mode Multiple Spanning Tree MST Rapid Spanning Tree RSTP O Per WAN Spanning Tse i PMST C Rapid Per VLAN Spanning Tree R PVYST Geographic Location D ual Power Supply Alarm Enable Aefresh Communication Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 197 Chapter 5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Table 30 Switch Configuration Tab Fields Field IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Primary DNS Server Address Secondary DNS Server Address Domain Name Host Name Contact Geographic Location Spanning Tree Mode Dual Power Supply Alarm Refresh Set 198 Description This value must match the IP address on the General tab If you reconfigure your switch with a different IP address you can lose communication with the switch when you click Set To correct this problem you must go back to the Express Setup and General tab set the new IP address and download to the controller En
140. ation can be one of three types The type of translation determines the number of translation entries A switch can have a maximum of 128 translation entries Table 7 Number of Translation Entries by Translation Type Translation Translation Description Type Entries Single 1 Translates a single IP address Consists of the following e One private IP address e One public IP address Range Multiple Translates a range of IP addresses Consists of the following e One starting private IP address e One starting public IP address e Multiple entries based on the range you specify Subnet 1 Translates all of the IP addresses within a subnet or portion of a subnet Consists of the following e One starting private IP address e One starting public IP address aligned on valid subnet boundaries e Subnet mask EXAMPLE The following translation types count as 10 translation entries e Single translation for one device e Range translation for eight devices e Subnet translation for all the devices on the subnet Singe and range translation types have a one to one relationship between translations entries and addresses to be translated However subnet translations have a one to many relationship allowing one translation entry for many addresses Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Software Features Chapter 3 VLAN Assignments When configuring NAT you can assign one or more VLANs to a NAT instanc
141. atts the module is currently using Remaining Power Available Displays the amount of unused power in watts available to the module Smartports and VLANs From the Smartports amp VLANs tab you can assign Smartport roles and VLANs to ports on the switch You can also create edit and delete VLANs You must be online to configure these port features Most of the information on this tab is not displayed if you are offline General Connection Module Info Fault Program Action Switch Configuration Switch Status Port Configuration Smartports amp VLANs Port Thresholds Port Security PLE omartport amp LAN Assignment VLAN Configuration Gi None Gil None Fail Automation Device Fa1l 2 Automation Device Fal 3 Switch for Automation Fa1 4 Automation Device Fa1 5 None Fa1 6 None Fair None Fai None Statue Running VLAN Type and ID j Port Smartport VLAN Typeand D VLAN ID Nam Delete Edit Uu Sgan Native Access Voice Mr oe a ad nd M O 2 2 Im mi ow x a aljas om as 85 i P x _ xl1 wi gt x mell mel y m Ea orn xj xl s gt s gt xj xl gt x ss xj xl s gt sx Xx xl s gt sy New VLAN Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 203 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Table 34 Smartports and VLANs Tab Fields Field Port Smartport VLAN Configuration 204 Description The port s
142. aximum value The switch powers the port only if it discovers a powered device Use the static setting on a high priority interface e Off The switch disables powered device detection and never powers the PoE port even if an unpowered device is connected Use this mode only when you want to make sure power is never applied to a PoE port making the port a data only port Maximum Power Allocation cutoff power on a PoE Port The switch determines the cutoff power on a PoE port in this order 1 Manually when you configure the power level to budge for the port 2 Manually when you configure the power level that limits the power allocated to the port 3 Automatically when the switch sets the power usage of the device by using the IEEE classification and LLDP power negotiation or CDP power negotiation If you do not manually configure the cutoff power value the switch can automatically determine the value by using CDP power negotiation when connected to a Cisco end device If the switch cannot determine the value by using one of these methods it uses the default value of 15 4 W With PoE if you do not manually configure the cutoff power value the switch automatically determines it by using the device IEEE classification and LLDP power negotiation or CDP power negotiation with a Cisco end device If CDP or LLDP are not enabled the default value of 30 W is applied However without CDP or LLDP the switch does not allow devices to con
143. ay IP address must be part of the same subnet as the switch IP address The switch IP address and the default gateway IP address cannot be the same If all of your devices are in the same network and a default gateway is not used you do not need to enter an IP address in this field This field is enabled only if the IP assignment mode is Static You must specify a default gateway if your network management station and the switch are in different networks or subnetworks Otherwise the switch and your network management station cannot communicate with each other The IP address of the Network Time Protocol NTP server NTP is a networking protocol for clock synchronization between computer systems over packet switched variable latency data networks Advanced Settings The VLAN on which Common Industrial Protocol CIP is enabled The CIP VLAN can be the same as the management VLAN or you can isolate CIP traffic on another VLAN that is already configured on this device The IP address and subnet mask for the CIP VLAN if the CIP VLAN is different from the management VLAN The format is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be from 0 255 Make sure that the IP address that you assign to this device is not being used by another device in your network Indicates whether the settings for the CIP VLAN are the same as the management VLAN The password used for Telnet and CIP security The same passwor
144. c Host Configuration Protocol Enables or disables pools If selected all controls on the grid are set to online and the appropriate values are obtained from the switch DHCP Pool Name Starting IP Address Ending IP Address Delete Pool Refresh 210 and displayed If cleared all controls on the grid are set to offline From the keyboard press Alt D Displays the name of the DHCP IP address pool configured on the switch A DHCP IP address pool is a range or pool of available IP addresses that the switch can assign to connected devices The name can have up to 31 alphanumeric characters The name cannot contain a ora tab Displays the starting IP address that defines the range of addresses in the DHCP IP address pool The format is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods for example 255 255 255 255 Each number can be from 0 255 Displays the ending IP address that defines the range of addresses in the DHCP IP address pool The format is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods for example 255 255 255 255 Each number can be from 0 255 Click to delete currently selected DHCP pool row Afterwards if you click Set a confirmation dialog box is displayed and all of the persistent addresses associated with the selected DHCP pool row are also deleted Delete Pool is available only when the switch is online the Enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP ch
145. cast routing which is required to enable routing e Unknown User configured from the CLI o Device Management SDM Template Select a template to enable routing Lanbase Routing Tr Default Lanbase Routing Unknown Status C Reload is in progress 3 Click Submit 4 When a message appears prompting you to continue click OK IMPORTANT The process of changing the template causes the switch to automatically restart A message appears once the process is complete o Device Management SDM Template Select a template to enable routing Lanbase Routing m Default Lanbase Routing Unknown Status Template changed successfully 5 To enable routing proceed to Enable and Configure Routing on page 148 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 181 Chapter 4 Restart the Switch 182 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Restarting or resetting the switch interrupts connectivity of your devices to the network To restart or reset the switch from the Admin menu choose Restart Reset o Device Management Restart Reset s Save running configuration then Restart the switch Restart the switch without save running configuration O Reset the switch to factory defaults and then restart the switch Submit Table 24 Restart Reset Fields Field Save running configuration and then restart the switch Restart the switch without saving r
146. ccocacaaaas 276 Console Potts w nase bd Ydd GDG 277 Stratix 5700 Console Port8 2s ueu GG Ga O 277 ArmorStratix 5700 Console Port a cca cac 278 PAI o a EEF FTN I hh Reena Ee hase epee 279 Cable and Adapter Specifications a UONG 280 SFP Module Cable Specifications 99 ee 280 PoE Port Cable Specifications Gan Bw EU 280 Adaprec PAN Y ET A I TW 280 Appendix D 1783 UM004D EN P March 2014 cocu c uu uu 283 1783 UM004C EN P December 2013 283 1783 UMO04B EN P June 2013 LY YY iu 285 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Studio 5000 Environment Preface This publication describes the embedded software features and tools for configuring and managing the Stratix 5700 Ethernet managed switches In addition this publication provides troubleshooting information to help you resolve basic switch and network issues Use this manual if you configure and monitor Stratix 5700 Ethernet managed switches This manual assumes you understand the following e Local area network LAN switch fundamentals e Concepts and terminology of the Ethernet protocol and local area networking The Studio 5000 Automation Engineering amp Design Environment combines engineering and design elements into a common environment The first element is the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application The
147. chnical Data publication 1783 TD001 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 123 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Port Utilization You can choose which types of network traffic to display and in what format e Types of traffic By default all traffic is displayed for all interfaces Click the links above the display area to display all traffic errors received traffic or transmitted traffic e Formats Click the buttons below the display area to view the data in Chart Mode or Grid Mode e Chart details When displaying a chart position your mouse pointer over a bar or a point on the chart to view the data As you monitor the usage on the ports note whether the percentage is what you expect during that given time of network activity If usage is high when you expect it to be low a problem can exist Bandwidth allocation can also be based on whether the connection is operating in half duplex or full duplex mode These are some of the reasons for errors received on or sent from the switch ports e Bad cable connection e Defective ports e Software problems e Driver problems Data is collected at each 60 second system refresh Refer to Monitor Trends on page 170 for a graph to view per port patterns over incremental instances in time by 60 seconds 1 hour 1 day or 1 week Refer to Monitor Port Statistics on page 171 for details on the specific port errors detecte
148. ck Edit o Network Smartports TI artpor Custom Smartports Smartport Role C Port Name Role Ll Fal 1 None Fal 2 CS10 Test Ll Fai 3 None Ll Fai 4 None Ll Fal 5 None Ll Fal G None Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 4 Modify the VLAN assignments as needed e For ports applied with the Automation Device with QoS Switch For Automation Router For Automation or Wireless For Automation port role choose a VLAN from the Native VLAN list e For ports applied with the Automation Device Desktop For Automation Phone For Automation or None port role choose a VLAN from the Access VLAN list e For ports applied with the Phone For Automation port role choose a VLAN from the Voice VLAN list e For ports applied with the Port Mirroring port role choose a VLAN from the Ingress VLAN list and choose the port to be monitored from the Source Interface list Smartports Customize Interface Name Fa 1 2 Role CS10 Test Access Vlan 1 Native Vlan 1 Voice Vlan Ingress Vlan Source Interface GEE cancel 5 Click Submit Manage Custom Smartport Macros To create a custom Smartports macro follow these steps 1 Click the Custom Smartports tab 2 Click Add 3 Enter the name for the macro Macro names are case sensitive The string can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters The string cannot contain
149. d as above Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 179 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Manage Users 180 To add modify or delete users and user logon information for the switch from the Admin menu choose Users o Device Management Users Hr AU Name Privilege No data available For each user you can specify the information in the table below Name Po privilege Password Po Confirm Password EE cancel Table 23 Add User Fields Field Description Name The user name for this user Privilege The level of access for this user All users are assigned the Admin privilege and can change all parameters Password The password that is required for access with this user name Confirm Password The same password as above Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Reallocate Switch Memory Switch Management Database SDM templates optimize how switch memory is for Routin allocated for specific features such as routing To enable routing you must g change the defaulc SDM template co the Lanbase Routing template To apply an SDM template follow these steps 1 From the Admin menu choose SDM Template 2 Choose a template from the pull down menu e Default Gives balance to all Layer 2 functions e Lanbase Routing Maximizes system resources for IPv4 uni
150. d on each port 124 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Configure Smartports To assign Smartport roles to switch ports from the Configure menu choose Smartports o Network Smartports Custom Smartports Smartport Role f Edit C Port Name Role Ll Fai i None Ll Faj 2 CS10 Test Ll Fai 3 None LI Faia None Ll Fai 5 Automation Device C Fai 6 Multiport Automation Device Desktop for Automation Virtual Desktop for Automation Switch for Automation Router for Automation Phone for Automation Wireless for Automation Port Mirroring None Custom 5martports C510 Test Follow these guidelines when using Smartport roles e Before using Smartport roles decide which switch port is connected to which device type e Before attaching a device to the port or reconnecting devices that have been moved verify which Smartport role is applied to a port IMPORTANT We recommend that you do not change port settings after enabling a Smartport role on a port Any port setting changes can alter the effectiveness of the Smartport role e When the user attempts to apply a port role to a routed port in the Smartports window this error message appears A port role cannot be configured on a routed port To apply a Smartport role follow this procedure 1 From the Configure menu choose Smartports 2 Selecta port 3
151. d through a Layer 3 Switch or Router To create a NAT instance for traffic routed through a Layer 3 switch or router follow these steps 1 From the NAT tab click New Instance to display the General tab of the NAT Instance dialog box Se TE E General Public to Private Advanced Name Instancel Private to Public NAT Table Provide Private subnet devices unigue IP addresses on the Public subnet Subnet Mask 192 168 1 10 10 0 0 10 192 168 1 15 10 0 0 15 192 168 1 32 10 0 0 32 255 255 255 224 IN Gateway Translation Public 10 0 i 192 168 Private Refresh Communication 216 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 2 In the Name field type a unigue name to identify the instance The instance name cannot include spaces or exceed 32 characters 3 In the VLAN Association area check the checkbox next to each VLAN to assign to the instance For more information about VLAN assignments see page 105 4 Click New Entry to display the New Entry dialog box New Entry Provide Private subnet devices unique IP addresses on the Public subnet Number of Entries Available Type of Entry Starting Private IP Address Starting Public IP Address Range Subnet Mask Effective Private Addresses Effective Public Addresses Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 21
152. ddresses in RSLinx Software Linx Gateways Ethernet l Ethernet 10 0 0 210 9 83 BMSO6TGA Stratix 5700 1783 BMS06TGA Strath 5700 Use DHCP to obtain network HU i Use BOOTP ta obtain network contia i Network Mask Gateway Address Primar Name Server Secondary Name Server Domain Name Host Name Switch Status Network Interface Configured For each NAT instance you can monitor these diagnostics e Diagnostics for both private and public translations e Diagnostics for only private translations e Diagnostics for only public translations To access diagnostics for an instance from the NAT tab click the ellipse in the Diagnostics column DHCP Pool Display DHCP Address Assignment Time Syne Configuration Time Sync Information MAT Network Address Translation MAT Instance s Gil VLANs Gri VLANs e nme N Diagnostics med pe pe 22 Say Saar Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 229 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Table 44 NAT Diagnostics per Instance Field Current Active Translations Total NAT Translated Packets Total Private to Public Address Translations Total Public to Private Address Translations ARP Fixup ICMP Fixup Total Fixups Incoming Non Translated Traffic Pass Through Outgoing Non Translated Traffic Blocked Incoming Multicast Traffic Blocked Outgoing Multicast Traffic Pass Through
153. displayed in increments of seconds minutes hours or days To view the data in a table click the Grid Mode button below the area To display a chart click the Chart Mode button Use the 60s 1h I d and 1 w links to display the data in increments of 60 seconds 1 hour 1 day or 1 week To monitor trends from the Monitor menu choose Trends Statistics Trends Bandwidth Utilization Last Minute Last Hour Last Day Last Week Packet Error Last Minute Last Hour Last Day Last Week 1 20 30 40 5 10 20 40 50 60 econd econd 69 Last Minute d Last Minute l Sunday February 02 2014 11 41 AM l Sunday February 02 2014 11 41 AM Port Utilization Errors PoE Utilization Fa1 1 v All Errors Receive Transmit 24 Last Minute Last Hour Last Day Last Week 22 45 8 40 Description The Bandwidth Utilization graph indicates the percentage of the available bandwidth that was used The graph can show the bandwidth usage patterns over incremental instances in time by 60 seconds 60 minutes 24 hours or 14 days This graph also marks the highest peak reached The default is 60 seconds You can use this data to determine when network usage is high or low The Packet Error graph shows the percentage of packet errors collected over incremental instances in time by 60 seconds 60 minutes 24 hours or 14 days The default is 60 seconds Use this graph to audit the affects that co
154. does not act as a router Configuration Overview To configure NAT you create one or more unique NAT instances In a typical implementation only One instance is required A NAT instance contains entries that define each address translation as well as other configuration parameters The translations you define depend on whether traffic is routed through a Layer 3 switch or router or a Layer 2 switch e If traffic is routed through a Layer 3 switch or router Figure 4 you define the following A private to public translation for each device on the private subnet that needs to communicate on the public subnet A gateway translation for the Layer 3 switch or router You do not need to configure NAT for all devices on the private subnet For example you can choose to omit some devices from NAT to increase security decrease traffic or conserve public address space IMPORTANT Asa best practice we recommend you route traffic through a Layer 3 switch or router e If traffic is routed through a Layer 2 switch Figure 5 you define the following A private to public translation for each device on the private subnet that needs to communicate on the public subnet A public to private translation for each device on the public subnet that needs to communicate on the private subnet 1 Note that we use the terms private and public to differentiate the two networks on either side of the NAT device This does not infer
155. dress written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be from 0 255 Make sure that none of the IP address you assign are being used by other devices in your network This field is required The default router IP address for the DHCP client that uses this server The format is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be from 0 255 The domain name for the DHCP client The name can have up to 31 alphanumeric characters The name cannot contain a or a tab The IP addresses of the Domain Name System DNS IP servers available to a DHCP client The format is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be from 0 255 A number from 1 15 to identify the address pool The duration of the lease for an IP address that is assigned to a DHCP client Click one of the following e Never Expires e User Defined If you click User Defined enter the duration of the lease in the numbers of days hours and minutes This lease length is used for all assignments Reserve IP Addresses through DHCP Persistence You can reserve and preassign an IP address from the IP address pool to a specific switch port so that a device connected to that switch port always receives the same IP address regardless of its MAC address DHCP persistence is useful in networks that are set up in advance where dependencies on the exact IP addresses of some devices ex
156. dule defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_GB_MANAGED 0 0 Type Default Display Valid Values Style Member Name AllPortsDisabled PortFa1_ 1Disable PortFa1_2Disable PortFa1_3Disable PortFa1_4Disable PortFa1_5Disable PortFa1_6Disable PortFa1_7Disable PortFa1_8Disable PortFa1_9Disable PortFa1_ 10Disable PortFa1_ 11Disable PortFa1_ 12Disable PortFa1_ 13Disable PortFa1_ 14Disable PortFa1_ 15Disable PortFa1_ 16Disable PortGi1_ 1Disable PortGi1_ 2Disable Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 DisablePort 0 DisablePort 1 DisablePort 2 DisablePort 3 DisablePort 4 DisablePort 5 DisablePort 6 DisablePort 7 DisablePort 8 DisablePort 9 DisablePort 10 DisablePort 11 DisablePort 12 DisablePort 13 DisablePort 14 DisablePort 15 DisablePort 16 DisablePort 19 DisablePort 20 Module defined Input Data Type 20 port Gb switches Module defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Type Default Display Valid Values Style Member Name Fault AnyPortConnected PortFa1_ 1Connected PortFa1_2Connected PortFa1_3Connected PortFa1_4Connected PortFa1_5Connected PortFa1_6Connected PortFal_7Connected PortFal_ 8Connected PortFal_ 9Connected PortFal_ 10Connected PortFa1_11Connected PortFa1_12Connected PortFa1_13Connected PortFa1_ 14Connected PortFa1_15Connected PortFa1_16Connected PortFa1_17Connected PortFa1_18Connected PortGi1_ 1Connected PortGi1_2Connected AnyPortUnauthoriz
157. e When you assign a VLAN toa NAT instance the traffic associated with that VLAN is subject to the configuration parameters of the NAT instance Configuration parameters include whether traffic is translated fixed up blocked or passed through IMPORTANT Setupall Smartport roles and VLANs before creating NAT instances If you change a Smartport role or the native VLAN for a port associated with a NAT instance you must reassign VLANs to the NAT instance When assigning VLANs to a NAT instance consider the following e NAT supports both trunk ports and access ports e NAT does not change VLAN tags e You can assign a maximum of 128 VLANs to one or more instances e You can assign the same VLAN to multiple instances as long as the VLAN is associated with different ports For example you can assign VLAN 1 to both instance A and instance B as long as VLAN 1 is associated with port Gil 1 on instance A and port Gi1 2 on instance B e By default each instance is assigned to all VLANs on port Gil 1 and no instances on port Gil 2 VLANs associated with a trunk port can or can not be assigned to a NAT instance e Ifa VLAN is assigned to a NAT instance its traffic is subject to the configuration parameters of the NAT instance e Ifa VLAN is unassigned to a NAT instance its traffic remains untranslated and is always permitted to pass through the trunk port Management Interface and VLANs The management interface can be associ
158. e A to USB mini Type B cable is not supplied Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 277 AppendixC Cables and Connectors ArmorStratix 5700 Console Port ArmorStratix 5700 switches have one console port The console port uses a male 5 pin DC Micro style M12 connector configuration cordset such as Allen Bradley Bulletin 889D For more information see publication 889DS PP001 Figure 18 Console Port Pinout 1 2 4 3 1 RTS 4 RXD 2 CTS 5 GND 3 T D 32500 Figure 19 DB9 Connector Pinout M8 Cable DB9 S Connector o WwW 278 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Alarm Ports Cables and Connectors Appendix C The front panel alarm relay connector and ports are described below The alarm connector uses a male 5 pin DC Micro style M12 connector configuration cordset such as Allen Bradley Bulletin 889D For more information see publication 889DS PP001 Figure 20 Alarm Connector Pinout 1 2 5 4 3 1 NO 4 Unconnected 2 NC 5 Common 3 Unconnected Figure 21 Wiring Example for Alarm Inputs and Outputs Alarms Connector To User s Alarm Input u 2 Alarm 24V DC from User Relay lt lt Coil To User s Alarm Input gt Alarm Input 2 7 User supplied contact closure generates external alarms Alarm Input 1 _ J Label Connection NO Alarm Output Normally Open NO connection COM Alarm Output Common connection NC Alarm Out
159. e available power that can be drawn by powered devices from 15 4 30 W per port e Automatic detection and power budgeting The switch maintains a power budget monitors and tracks requests for power and grants power only when it is available e Power to connected Cisco pre standard and IEEE 802 3af compliant powered devices if the switch detects that there is no power on the circuit e Support for Cisco Discovery Protocol CDP with power consumption This features applies only when using switches with Cisco end devices The powered Cisco end device notifies the switch of the amount of power it is consuming The switch can supply or remove power from the PoE port e Support for Cisco intelligent power management A powered Cisco end device and the switch negotiate through power negotiation CDP messages for an agreed power consumption level The negotiation allows a high powered device consuming more than 7 W to operate at its highest power mode The powered device first starts up in Low power mode consumes less than 7 W and negotiates to obtain enough power to operate in High power mode The device changes to High power mode only when it receives confirmation from the switch Cisco intelligent power management is backward compatible with CDP with power consumption The module responds according to the CDP message that it receives CDP is not supported on third party powered devices so the module uses the IEEE classification to determin
160. e default is None e Preferred A secondary edge port that is the preferred alternate port for VLAN load balancing Configure segment topology change notices STCNs for a port The default is None TCNs are used within the segment to notify REP neighbors of topology changes At the edge of the segment REP can propagate the notification to the STP or to the other REP segments Configure STCNs to a segment ID The default is a blank field TCNs are used within the segment to notify REP neighbors of topology changes At the edge of the segment REP can propagate the notification to the STP or to the other REP segments Configure STCNs to an STP network The default is cleared checkbox TCNs are used within the segment to notify REP neighbors of topology changes At the edge of the segment REP can propagate the notification to the STP or to the other REP segments Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Configure NAT To configure NAT follow one of these procedures based on your application e Create NAT Instances for Traffic Routed through a Layer 3 Switch or Router For an example of this application see Figure 4 on page 102 e Create NAT Instances for Traffic Routed through a Layer 2 Switch For an example of this application see Figure 5 on page 103 IMPORTANT Setupall Smartport roles and VLANs before creating NAT instances If you change
161. e defined Output Data Type 16 port switches Module defined Input Data Type 20 port Gb switches 254 Module defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_16PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name PortFa1_110Utilization PortFa1_ 12Utilization PortFa1_ 13Utilization PortFa1_ 14Utilization PortFa1_ 15Utilization PortFa1_ 16Utilization MajorAlarmRelay MulticastGroupsActive Type SINT SINT SINT SINT SINT SINT BOOL DINT AB STRATIX_5700_16PORT_MANAGED 0 0 Default Display Style Valid Values Member Name AllPortsDisabled PortFa1_ Disable PortFa1_2Disable PortFa1_3Disable PortFa1_4Disable PortFa1_5Disable PortFa1_6Disable PortFa1_7Disable PortFa1_8Disable PortFa1_9Disable PortFa1_ 10Disable PortFa1_ 11Disable PortFa1_ 12Disable PortFa1_ 13Disable PortFa1_ 14Disable PortFa1_ 15Disable PortFa1_ 16Disable BOOL AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Type Default Display Valid Values Style Member Name Fault AnyPortConnected PortFa1_ 1Connected PortFa1_2Connected PortFa1_3Connected Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Default Display Style Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Decimal Binary Decimal E C Valid Values AlarmRelay 0 DisablePort 0 DisablePort 1 DisablePort 2 DisablePort 3 DisablePort 4 DisablePort 5 DisablePort 6 DisablePort 7 DisablePort 8 DisablePort 9 DisablePort 10 DisablePort 11 DisablePort 12 DisablePort 13 DisablePort 14 Disabl
162. e fully inserted stop Do not N force the module into the slot Rotate the SFP module 180 and try again 3 Insert the SFP module into the slot as shown in the following figure until you feel the connector on the module snap into place in the rear of the slot SFP Module Bale type Latch Shown 32293 M 4 Remove the dust plugs from the SFP module optical ports store them for later use IMPORTANT Do not remove the dust plugs from the SFP module port or the rubber caps from the fiber optic cable until you are ready to connect the cable The plugs and caps protect the SFP module ports and cables from contamination and ambient light Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 47 Chapter2 Switch Installation Remove SFP Modules from SFP Module Slots To remove an SFP module from a module receptacle follow these steps 1 Attach an ESD preventive wrist strap to your wrist and to a grounded bare metal surface 2 Disconnect the fiber LC connector from the SFP module 3 Insert a dust plug into the optical ports of the SFP module to keep the optical interfaces clean 4 Unlock and remove the SFP module If the module has a bale clasp latch swing the bale toward you and pull it gently to eject the module If the bale clasp latch is obstructed and you cannot use your index finger to open it use a small flat blade screwdriver or other long narrow instrument to open the bale clasp latch
163. e is 15 4 W If the port is in Static mode you can enter a value to reserve power for the port General Connection Module Info Switch Configuration Switch Status Port Configuration PoE Advanced Port Configuration Port Thresholds Port Status DHCP Pool Display gt Power Over Ethernet PoE Port Configuration Fa3 Expansion Module Statistics 202 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Table 33 PoE Tab Fields continued Field Description Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Total Power Supported To limit the total PoE power budget type an appropriate value based on the power source e A 48V power source supports a maximum of 65 W A 54V power source supports a maximum of 130 W When you save this setting it changes the total PoE power budget and resets the powered devices to meet the new budget IMPORTANT A mismatch between the total power supported and the power supply can cause damage to the switch Take care not to oversubscribe the power supply Chapter 5 e Ifyou intend to connect the switch to a power supply that allows more wattage than configured first change the power supply and then specify the total power supported e Ifyou intend to connect the switch to a power supply that allows less wattage than configured first change the total power supported to an appropriate value and then change the power supply Total Power Used Displays the amount of power in w
164. e the power usage of the device Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 85 Chapter 3 86 Switch Software Features Powered Device Detection and Initial Power Allocation A switch detects a powered device when a port with PoE capability is active PoE is enabled the default and the connected device is not being powered by another power source After device detection the switch determines the device power requirements based on its type e The switch classifies the detected 802 3 af at compliant IEEE device within a power consumption class Based on the available power in the power budget the switch determines if a PoE port can be powered The table below lists these levels Table 5 IEEE Power Classifications Class Power Supplied per Port max 0 class status unknown 15 4W 1 4W 2 7W 3 15 4W 4 30 W PoE devices only e A Cisco pre standard powered device does not provide its power requirement when the switch detects it A port that is not configured for PoE allocates 15 4 W as the initial allocation for power budgeting A port that is configured for a PoE switch allocates 30 W The initial power allocation is the maximum amount of power that a powered device requires The switch initially allocates this amount of power when it detects and powers the powered device As the switch receives CDP messages from the powered device and as the powered device negotiates power levels with the module throu
165. ePort 15 DisablePort 16 LinkStatus 0 LinkStatus 1 LinkStatus 2 LinkStatus 3 Module defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Type Default Display Valid Values Style Member Name PortFal_ 4Connected PortFa1_5Connected PortFa1_6Connected PortFal_7Connected PortFal_ 8Connected PortFal_9Connected PortFa1_10Connected PortFa1_11Connected PortFa1_12Connected PortFa1_13Connected PortFa1_14Connected PortFa1_15Connected PortFa1_16Connected PortFa1_17Connected PortFal_ 18Connected PortGi1_ 1Connected PortGi1_ 2Connected AnyPortUnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 2UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_3UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_4UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_5UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_6UnauthorizedDevice PortFal_7UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 8UnauthorizedDevice PortFal_ 9UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 10UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_11UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 12UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_13UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 14UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 15UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 16UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 17UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 18UnauthorizedDevice PortGi1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice PortGi1_2UnauthorizedDevice AnyPortThreshold Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 LinkStatus 4 LinkStatus 5 LinkStatus 6 LinkStatus 7 LinkStatus 8 LinkStatus 9 LinkStatus 10 LinkStatus 11 LinkStatus 12 LinkStatus 13 LinkStatus 14 LinkStatus 15 LinkStatus 16 LinkStatus 17 LinkStatus
166. echanism Grasp the card top and pull it out Place it in an antistatic bag to protect it from static discharge 32272 M 4 Close the guard door and fasten the captive screw by using a screwdriver to keep the door in place Verify Switch Operation Before installing the switch in its final location power on the switch and verify that the switch powers up The time required for the switch to start up is directly related to your switch configuration Start time is negatively affected by such things as the following e Spanning Tree Learning mode e Number of files or images in onboard flash memory Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 To test the switch follow these steps 1 Apply power to the switch To apply power to a switch that is directly connected to a DC power source locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit and switch the circuit breaker to the ON position 2 Verify the start up sequence When you power on the switch it automatically begins a start up routine The System status indicator blinks green as the IOS software image loads If the routine fails the System status indicator turns red IMPORTANT Start up failures are usually fatal to the switch Contact your Rockwell Automation representative immediately if your switch does not complete the start sequence successfully IMPORTANT You can disable boot fast and r
167. eckbox is checked and when the respective row is populated Delete Pool is dimmed when the switch is offline and the Enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP checkbox is cleared Click to refresh the grid control with new data obtained directly from the switch From the keyboard press Alt R If you have changed a value in the grid and clicked Refresh before clicking Set all values in the grid are returned to their previously set values Refresh is available only when the switch is online The Refresh button is dimmed when the switch is offline Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 Table 40 DHCP Pool Dislay Tab Fields continued Field Edit Pool Properties New Pool Set Description Click to display the DHCP Pool Definition and Edit dialog box and populate it with values from the instance corresponding to the current row The Edit column button is available only when the switch is online the Enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP checkbox is selected and when the respective row is populated The Edit column button is dimmed when the switch is offline and the Enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP checkbox is cleared Click to display the DHCP Pool Definition and Edit dialog box all fields are blank and the Custom radio button is not selected Additionally a new row instance is added to the grid on the Modu
168. edDevice PortFa1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice PortFal_ 2UnauthorizedDevice PortFal_ 3UnauthorizedDevice PortFal_4UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_5UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_6UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_7UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 8UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 9UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 10UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_11UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 12UnauthorizedDevice PortFal_ 13UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 14UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 15UnauthorizedDevice Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 LinkStatus 0 LinkStatus 1 LinkStatus 2 LinkStatus 3 LinkStatus 4 LinkStatus 5 LinkStatus 6 LinkStatus 7 LinkStatus 8 LinkStatus 9 LinkStatus 10 LinkStatus 11 LinkStatus 12 LinkStatus 13 LinkStatus 14 LinkStatus 15 LinkStatus 16 LinkStatus 17 LinkStatus 18 LinkStatus 19 LinkStatus 20 UnauthorizedDevice 0 UnauthorizedDevice 1 UnauthorizedDevice 2 UnauthorizedDevice 3 UnauthorizedDevice 4 UnauthorizedDevice 5 UnauthorizedDevice 6 UnauthorizedDevice 7 UnauthorizedDevice 8 UnauthorizedDevice 9 UnauthorizedDevice 10 UnauthorizedDevice 11 UnauthorizedDevice 12 UnauthorizedDevice 13 UnauthorizedDevice 14 UnauthorizedDevice 15 Appendix A 261 Appendix A 262 Module defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Default Display Valid Values Style PortFa1_ 16UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 16 PortFa1_ 17UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 17 PortFa1_ 18UnauthorizedDevice Una
169. edDevice 17 BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 18 BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 19 BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 20 BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 21 BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 22 BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 23 BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 24 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 0 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 1 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 2 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 3 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 4 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 5 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 6 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 7 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 8 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 9 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 10 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 11 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 12 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 13 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 14 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 15 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 16 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 17 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 18 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 19 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 20 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 21 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 22 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 23 BOOL ThresholdExceeded 24 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Module defined Data Types Appendix A AB STRATIX_5700_24PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name PortFa1_2Utilization PortFa1_3Utilization PortFa1_4Utilization PortFa1_5Utilization PortFa1_6Utilization PortFa1_7Utilization PortFa1_ 8Utilization PortFa1_9Utilization PortFa1_ 10Utilization PortFa1_11Utilization PortFa1_ 12Utilization PortFa1_ 13Utilization PortFa1_ 14Utilization PortFa1_ 15Utilization PortFa1_ 16Utilization PortFa1_ 17Utilization PortFa1_ 18Utilization PortFa1_ 19Utilization PortFa1_20Utilization PortFa1_21Utilizatio
170. edures to set up the switch in Chapter 1 About the Switches If the switch is installed in your network but you cannot access the switch because it has the wrong IP address assign a new switch IP address Refer to Access Direct Managed Mode on page 237 to assign the IP address and then update the switch IP address on the Device Manager Express Setup window Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 235 Chapter6 Troubleshoot the Switch Device Manager Web Interface Issues Issue Device Manager Web interface does not display Device Manager Web interface is not operating properly Device Manager Web interface is not accessible through the network 236 These are some basic troubleshooting for issues related to displaying the Device Manager Web interface Resolution If you cannot display the Device Manager Web interface from your computer or laptop make sure that you entered the correct switch IP address in the browser If you entered the correct switch IP address in the browser make sure that the switch and your computer or laptop are in the same network or subnetwork e For example if your switch IP address is 172 20 20 85 and your computer or laptop IP address is 172 20 20 84 both devices are in the same network e For example if your switch IP address is 172 20 20 85 and your computer or laptop IP address is 10 0 0 2 the devices are in different networks and cannot directly communicate without a
171. eguivalent SD Card 1784 SD1 Switch Software Features Feature CIP Sync IEEE 1588 Resilient Ethernet Protocol REP FlexLinks Quality of Service QoS STP RSTP MST instances IGMP Snooping with querier VLANs with trunking EtherChannel link aggregation Port Threshold Storm Control and Traffic Shaping IPv6 support Access Control Lists ACL Static and interVLAN routing CIP port control and fault detection MAC ID Port security IEEE 802 1x security TACACS RADIUS authentication Encryption SSH SNMPv3 HTTPS Port mirroring Syslog Broken wire detection Duplicate IP address detection SNMP Smartports DHCP per port Command line interface CLI 1 GB Industrial SD card About the Switches These software features are available with the Stratix 5700 switches Lite Firmware o o Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Full Firmware Separate option 128 255 Chapter 1 Separate 10S firmware available as a separate catalog item 17 Chapter1 About the Switches Compatible with Cisco tools Cisco Network Assistant CNA CiscoWorks Network address translation NAT Separate option Stratix 5700 Switch These diagrams are representative of the switches Actual faceplates vary Dimensions depending on the catalog number 6 SFP port Switches 6 port Switches 1783 BMS4S2SGL 1783 BMS4S2SGA 1783 BMS06SL 1783 BMSO06SA 1783 BMSO6TL 1783 BMSO6TA 1783 BMS06SGL
172. elected for configuration The port number includes the port type Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet and the specific port number EXAMPLE Gi1 1 is Gigabit Ethernet port 1 Smartport roles are recommended configurations for the ports These configurations are referred to as port roles They optimize the switch connections and provide security transmission quality and reliability to traffic from the switch ports These configurations also prevent many problems caused by port misconfigurations The port roles are based on the type of device that is connected to the switch port Make sure you decide which port is connected to which type of device before you choose a Smartport role Choose one of these Smartport roles to apply to the connected port e Automation Device Apply this role to ports to be connected to EtherNet IP devices It can be used for industrial automation devices such as logic controllers and 1 0 Port is set to Access mode Port security supports only one MAC ID Optimize queue management for CIP traffic e Desktop for Automation Apply this role to ports to be connected to desktop devices such as desktop computers workstations notebook computers and other client based hosts Do not apply this role to ports to be connected to switches routers or access points Port is set to Access mode Portfast enabled Port security supports only one MAC ID e Switch for Automation Apply
173. ell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 115 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Notes 116 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Chapter 4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Topic Page Access the Device Manager Web Interface 118 Dashboard Overview 119 Configure Smartports 125 Configure Port Settings 132 Configure Port Thresholds 134 Configure EtherChannels 135 Configure DHCP 137 Configure VLANs 141 Configure Power over Ethernet PoE Ports 142 Configure PTP Time Synchronization 145 Enable and Configure Routing 148 Configure STP 149 Configure REP 151 Configure NAT 153 Configure Port Security 162 Configure IGMP Snooping 164 Configure SNMP 165 Configure Alarm Settings 166 Configure Alarm Profiles 168 Monitor Trends 170 Monitor Port Statistics 171 Monitor NAT Statistics 172 Monitor REP Topology 173 Monitor CIP Status 174 Diagnose Cabling Problems 176 View System Log Messages 177 Use Express Setup to Change Switch Settings 178 Manage Users 180 Reallocate Switch Memory for Routing 181 Restart the Switch 182 Upgrade the Switch Firmware 183 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 117 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Topic Page Use the SD Card to Synchronize the Configuration or 10S Files 184 Upload and Download Configuration Files 186 Upgrade License Files 186 After you complete Express Setup you can manage t
174. em refresh The gauge changes as the switch experiences the network activity from devices sending data through the network As network activity increases so does contention between devices to send data through the network As you monitor utilization on the switch note whether the percentage of usage is what you expect during that given time of network activity If utilization is high when you expect it to be low perhaps a problem exists As you monitor the switch note if the bandwidth utilization is consistently high This can mean there is congestion in the network If the switch reaches its maximum bandwidth above 90 utilization and its buffers become full it begins to discard the data packets that it receives Some packet loss in the network is not considered unusual and the switch is configured to help recover lost packets such as by signaling to other devices to resend data However excessive packet loss can create packet errors which can degrade overall network performance To reduce congestion consider segmenting the network into subnetworks that are connected by other switches or routers Look for other causes such as faulty devices or connections that can also increase bandwidth utilization on the switch Temperature The Temperature gauge shows the internal temperature of the switch For information about the switch temperature range and the operating environment guidelines see the Stratix Ethernet Device Specifications Te
175. enter to alert people to potential Arc Flash Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment PPE Follow ALL Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment PPE gt gt gt Allen Bradley ArmorStratix 5700 Logix5000 Rockwell Automation Rockwell Software RSLinx RSLogix RSNetWorx Stratix 2000 Stratix 5700 Stratix 8000 Stratix 8300 Studio 5000 Studio 5000 Automation Engineering amp Design Environment and Studio 5000 Logix Designer are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Summary of Changes This manual contains new and updated information Changes throughout this revision are marked by change bars as shown to the righc of this paragraph New and Updated This table contains the changes made to this revision Information Topic Page New switch catalog number descriptions 16 New switch dimensions 18 21 100BASE FX SX and 1000BASE FX SX port descriptions 23 ArmorStratix 5700 switch installation 57 66 Express Setup on SFP port switches 67 68 70 73 Power over Ethernet PoE configuration in Studio 5000 environment 201 Module defined data types for 8 16 and 24 port switches 247 248 252 254 267 270 CIP data assignments for 8 16 and 24 port switches 271 ArmorStratix 5700 console port 278 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June
176. er it performs a three way handshake with a neighbor in the same segment Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 SNMP Switch Software Features Chapter 3 The switch supports Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP versions 1 2C and 3 SNMP enables the switch to be remotely managed through other network management software This feature is disabled by default SNMP is based on three concepts e SNMP managers client software e SNMP agents network devices e Management Information Base MIB Refer to Supported MIBs on page 112 for the MIBs supported on the switch The SNMP manager runs SNMP management software Network devices to be managed such as bridges routers servers and workstations have an agent software module The agent provides access to a local MIB of objects that reflects the resources and activity of the device The agent also responds to manager commands to retrieve values from the MIB and to set values in the MIB The agent and the MIB are on the switch To configure SNMP on the switch you define the relationship between the manager and the agent Both SNMPv1 and v2C use a community based form of security SNMP managers can access the agent MIB through passwords referred to as community strings SNMPv1 and v2C are generally used for network monitoring without network control SNMPv3 provides network monitoring and control It provides secure access to devices by a combination of authe
177. erfaCe cc teen Y Y ecce CIP Network Connections YL FFY ue RSLinx Software and Network Who Support Electronic Data Sheet EDS Files Data Accessible With CIP Y cee eee eee eee Add a Switch to the I O Configuration Tree Configure General Propertiesz see DG anaes es Connection Pro pettics sist avidin WG Ud ds FO Module Information 0 cece cece cece eee Y Yu ud Switch Configuration Properti s ue ae FWG ER Switch o ud CR _ MU YA Y TN NW PUY NN Porc Connedrati oni ao edeu gnes A OG dd drw YO Gw G0 Power over Ethernet PoE YY Y YY Y EY Smattports and VLAINS cbe Gb God 94 Port Lhreshold ess ea gy Gw O DO GG Wy tr EG EE Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Troubleshoot the Switch Module defined Data Types Table of Contents PORE oeu lad GDG Y GY AC OU 206 Pore oLa ET EE N Tn 207 Pore 1 Hemostie aa i N QA M EEA 208 Cable IDIAGDOSL IG GG a OTE 209 DHCP Pool isplay nesiete nae E R Ea 210 DHCP Address Asson are Y EEE 212 Time Sync Con curatio niae sr wy sd YN Yd BD YD ARA 213 NEA IC on nu uri oni sith CA Un CA SF Ed 215 Create NAT Instances for Traffic Routed through a Layer 3 Switch or Router 0 cece eee eee 216 Create NAT Instances for Traffic Routed throne ha Laver 2 SWAG o GU CW id bnd dd OO 898 220 Configure Traffic Permits and
178. erier e Enable CIP e Configure QoS settings and classify CIP PTP and other traffic does not apply to switches with lite firmware revisions e Enables alarms SYSLOG and SNMP notifications e Enables Rapid Spanning Tree RSTP BPDU Guard BPDU Filtering and loop guard If you do not run Express Setup to initialize the switch the global macro does not run You can use the CLU to run the global macro 82 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Smartports Table 4 Smartport Roles Port Role Automation Device Multiport Automation Device Desktop for Automation Virtual Desktop for Automation Switch for Automation Router for Automation Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Smartports are recommended configurations for the switch ports These configurations referred to as port roles optimize the switch connections and provide security transmission quality and reliability for traffic from the switch ports The port roles also help prevent port misconfigurations TIP Use Smartport roles immediately after the initial setup of the switch to correctly configure the switch ports before they connect to devices Optimize Ports through Smartports Port Roles The port roles described in Table 4 are based on the type of devices to be connected to the switch ports For example the Desktop for Automation port role is specifically for switch ports to be connected to desktop and laptop computers Custom
179. erminal B Ho SO Card Present No Status Running Table 31 Switch Status Tab Fields Field Description Active Alarms Displays one of these values e None Port alarm Major Alarm Relay Active Faults Traffic Threshold Exceeded on Any Port Switch Uptime Switch Temperature Bandwidth Utilization Power Present on Terminal A Power Present on Terminal B Number of Active Multicast Groups IOS Release e Dual Mode Power Supply alarm e Primary Temperature alarm Displays one of these values e Open e Closed Displays one of these values e None e Port fault e Hardware fault If the port and hardware faults are active the Hardware fault status appears Displays a yes or no value indicating whether the current unicast multicast and broadcast thresholds have been exceeded on any port To view the status of the active ports click the Port Status tab To view the threshold values click the Advanced Port Threshold tab Displays the days hours and minutes that the switch has been functioning since the last restart Displays the current internal temperature in degree Celsius of the switch Displays the total percentage of the switch bandwidth being used Displays a yes or no value indicating whether power is present on Terminal A Displays a yes or no value indicating whether power is present on Terminal B Displays the number of active multicast groups Displays the current version of the switch operating s
180. ersistence table of Switch 1 it does not receive an IP address from the switch pool because it is not defined in the persistence table and unused addresses in the pool are blocked A new device connected to switch 1 FA1 receives an IP address from the Switch 1 persistence table A broadcast request is not sent across the network therefore Switch 2 does not respond Note that if a device is connected to FA7 not defined in the DHCP persistence table of Switch 1 it receives an unassigned IP address from the Switch 1 pool Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 To assign modify or delete a switch port IP address click che DHCP Persistence tab O Network DHCP Global Settings Interface Pool Name IP Address EE En Fal 2 None Save Care Fa1 3 None Falj4 None Fal 5 None Fal 6 None Table 14 DHCP Persistence Fields Field Description Interface The number of the switch port including port type such as Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet and the specific port number For example Fa1 1 is Fast Ethernet port 1 on the switch Pool Name The name of the DHCP IP address pool configured on the switch IP Address The IP address assigned to the switch port The IP address that you assign is reserved for the selected port and is not available for normal DHCP dynamic assignment The IP address must be an address from the pool spec
181. es e Airflow around the switch is unrestricted To prevent the switch from overheating observe the following minimum clearances Top and bottom 50 8 mm 2 0 in Sides 50 8 mm 2 0 in Front 50 8 mm 2 0 in Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 31 Chapter 2 32 Switch Installation For 10 100 ports and 10 100 1000 ports the cable length from a switch to an attached device cannot exceed 100 m 328 ft The fiber optic cable length from a switch to an attached device cannot exceed the distance specified in Appendix C For maximum noise immunity shielded cables must be used on the RJ45 uplink ports Gil 1 and Gil 2 on these switches 1783 BMSO6TGL 1783 BMSO6TGA 1783 BMS10CGL 1783 BMS10CGA 1783 BMS10CGN 1783 BMS10CGP 1783 BMS12T4E2CGNK 1783 BMS12T4E2CGP 1783 BMS12T4E2CGL 1783 BMS20CGL 1783 BMS20CGN 1783 BMS20CGP 1783 BMS20CGPK Temperature surrounding the unit does not exceed 60 C 140 F IMPORTANT When the switch is installed in an industrial enclosure the temperature within the enclosure is greater than normal room temperature outside the enclosure The temperature inside the enclosure cannot exceed 140 F 60 C the maximum ambient enclosure temperature of the switch Clearance to front and rear panels meets these conditions Front panel status indicators can be easily read Access to ports is sufficient for unre
182. ese steps ATTENTION To prevent electrostatic discharge ESD damage follow recommended board and component handling procedures 1 Choose one of these options to connect a device e When connecting to workstations servers and routers connect a straight through cable to an RJ45 connector on the front panel e When connecting to 1000BASE T compatible devices use a twisted four pair Category 5e or higher cable 10 100 Port j 32291 M 10 100 1000 Port 2 Connect the other end of the cable to an RJ45 connector on the other device The Port status indicator turns on when both the switch and the connected device have an established link The Port status indicator is amber while Spanning Tree Protocol STP discovers the topology and searches for loops This can take up to 30 seconds and then the Port status indicator turns green The following conditions can prevent the Port status indicator from turning On e The device at the other end is not turned On e A problem exists with a cable or the adapter installed in the attached device 3 Reconfigure and restart the connected device if necessary 4 Repeat this procedure to connect each device Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 53 Chapter2 Switch Installation Connect to PoE Ports Switches with PoE ports require a separate power supply For power supply requirements based on your application refer to
183. eshoot network problems The settings on a switch port must be compatible with the port settings of the connected device To change basic port settings from the Configure menu choose Port Settings lt Network Port Settings Physical Port Table Selected 0 Totalo 2 Edit Fort Name Description Port Status Speed Duplex Media Type Operational Mode Access VLAN Administrative Mode 5 I a r EM ER aue a 7 EEE a n i A TEU NWN 3 cr EU GN UN re O Fal O Auto Auto 10 100BaseTX Down 1 Access O Fal 3 O Auto Auto 10 100BaseTX Down 1 Dynamic auto O Fai 4 O Auto Auto 10 100BaseTX Down 1 Dynamic auto O Fal 5 O Auto Auto 10 100BaseTX Down 1 Dynamic auto O Fal 6 o Auto 100Mb s Auto Full 10 100BaseTX Static access 1 Dynamic auto Table 10 lists the basic settings for the switch ports To change these settings click the radio button next to the port name and click Edit to display the Edit Physical Port window Edit Physical Port Port Name Falf Description L Range 1 18 Characters Administrative Enable Speed Auto Duplex Auto Auto MDIX Enable Media Type Administrative Mode Trunk Access VLAN default 1 Allowed VLAN All VLANs Owasms 664 2 8 Natiwe VLAN management 500 132 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Table 10 Port Settings Field Port Name Description Port Status Speed Duplex Auto MDIX Media Type Manage t
184. esses that are not fixed up encrypted IP addresses or reliance on multicast traffic e Traffic encryption and integrity checking protocols generally incompatible with NAT including IPsec Transport mode 1756 EN2TSC module e Applications that use dynamic session initiations such as NetMeeting e File transfer protocol FTP e Microsoft Distributed Component Object Model DCOM which is used in Open Platform Communications OPC e Multicast traffic including applications that use multicast such as CIP Sync IEEE1588 and CLX redundancy Traffic Permits and Fixups While a NAT configured port can translate many types of traffic only unicast and broadcast traffic are supported You can choose to block or pass through the following traffic types that are not handled by NAT e Untranslated unicast traffic e Multicast traffic e IGMP traffic By default all of the above traffic types are blocked Some traffic types must be fixed up to work properly with NAT because their packets contain embedded IP addresses The switch supports fixups for these traffic types e Address Resolution Protocol ARP e Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP By default fixups are enabled for both ARP and ICMP 106 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Resilient Ethernet Protocol Switch Software Features Chapter 3 The Resilient Ethernet Protocol REP provides an alternative to Spanning Tree Protocol STP to co
185. etal surface such as a ground bus a grounded DIN rail or a grounded bare rack Wire the Switch DC Power Source To wire the DC power source for the switch follow these steps that power is removed from the DC circuit or the area is nonhazardous before ATTENTION Before performing any of the following procedures make sure proceeding e This product is intended to be supplied by a Class 2 power source marked with Class 2 and rated from 12 24 or 48V DC 2 5 A e To comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive LVD this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with the safety extra low voltage SELV or protected extra low voltage PELV e A readily accessible two poled disconnect device must be incorporated in the fixed wiring e This product relies on the building s installation for short circuit overcurrent protection Make sure that the protective device is rated not greater than 3 A e Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes e Allow only trained and qualified personnel to install replace or service this equipment use UL and CSA rated style 1007 or 1569 twisted pair copper appliance wiring ATTENTION For wire connections to the power and relay connector you must material AWM wire 40 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 1 Locate the power connector Z i Wan 4 P 2 Identify the p
186. ew IP address IMPORTANT Restarting the switch interrupts connectivity of your devices to the network From the Device Manager Web interface do the following 1 Access the Device Manager Web interface Restart Reset dialog box 2 Click Reset the Switch This option resets the switch deletes the current configuration settings returns to the factory default settings and then restarts the switch If you do not know the switch IP address follow the procedure in the Access Direct Managed Mode section on page 237 to access Direct Managed mode Then go back to step 1 above Before you can recover switch firmware you must make sure of the following e You must have physical access to the switch e Make sure that at least one switch port is enabled and is not connected to a device If the image is corrupted you can recover the switch firmware A symptom of corrupted firmware is the switch continuously trying to restart Other reasons to recover the switch firmware are if you deleted the image due toa failed firmware upgrade and if you have forgotten the switch password Recovering the switch firmware involves deleting all switch configuration settings and returning the switch to its factory default settings To return the switch to its factory default settings follow these steps 1 With the switch already powered up and started press and hold the Express Setup button until the Setup and EIP Net status indicators turn red Th
187. fic pattern is normal or if it could mean a problem Receive Detail tab Use this tab to troubleshoot unusual changes in network traffic This tab displays these statistics Unicast multicast and broadcast packets received on each port Detailed statistics of errors received on each port If a port is receiving an unusually high amount of traffic such as multicast or broadcast packets monitor the connected device to see if this traffic pattern is normal for the connected device or if it could mean a problem Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 171 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Monitor NAT Statistics You can monitor these types of NAT statistics e Global statistics for all instances Statistics per instance Detailed private translations per instance Detailed public translations per instance To display the NAT Statistics window from the Monitor menu choose NAT Statistics statistics NAT Statistics Global Statistics Current Active Translations Total Translations Total NAT Translated Packets Total Dropped Packets Reset All Instance Statistics Selected NAT Instance 7 Translations Detail Reset Current Active Translations Total NAT Translation Packets Total Dropped Packets Total Private to Public Translations Total Public to Private Translations Total Translations ARP Fixup ICMP Fixup Total Fixups Non Translated
188. figuration overrides both the IEEE classification shown in the Class column and power negotiation If no override is configured the field displays N A You can configure a power override only by using the command line interface CLI For more information refer to the Cisco IE 3000 Software Configuration Guide EXAMPLE An administrator can choose to configure an override when the power requirement of a connected device is known and is less than the maximum value for the class For instance if a device requires only 5 W but is in Class 0 which allows a maximum of 15 4 W configuring an override allows more power to other devices Displays the device connected to the port If no device is connected to the port the field displays N A Displays the power classification of the powered device PD For power classification descriptions see Table 5 on page 86 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Configure PTP Time Synchronization Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 The IEEE 1588 standard defines a protocol called Precision Time Protocol PTP which enables precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and control systems The clocks communicate with each other over the EtherNet IP communication network The PTP protocol enables heterogeneous systems that include clocks of various inherent precision resolution and stability to synchronize PTP generates a Master Slave relationship amo
189. figure static route information as described below Field Description Destination Network The IP address of the destination Destination Mask The subnet mask of the destination Next Hop Router The IP address of the router where this device will send the packets for the specified destination Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Configure STP Spanning Tree Protocol STP modes include the following e Multiple Spanning Tree MST prevents network loops by enabling only one active path for traffic MST also provides a redundant path if the active path becomes unavailable This is the default STP mode e Per VLAN Spanning Tree Plus PVST runs on each VLAN on the switch up to the maximum supported ensuring loop free path through the network e Rapid Per VLAN Spanning Tree Plus RPVST immediately deletes dynamically learned MAC address entries upon receiving a topology change By contrast PVST uses a short aging time for dynamically learned MAC addresses We recommend that you leave STP enabled to prevent network loops and provide a redundant path if the active path becomes unavailable IMPORTANT Disabling STP can affect connectivity to the network To configure Spanning Tree Protocol settings from the Configure menu choose STP Global Settings To choose the STP mode for the switch or to configure STP on individual VLANs click t
190. figured on one secure interface is seen on another secure interface in the same VLAN When a violation occurs the port goes into the Restrict mode In this mode packets with unknown source addresses are dropped and you are notified that a security violation has occurred An SNMP trap is sent a syslog message is logged and the violation counter increments An EtherChannel or port group is a group of two or more Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet switch ports bundled into a single logical link creating a higher bandwidth link between two switches The switch supports up to six EtherChannels Each EtherChannel can consist of up to eight compatible configured ethernet ports EtherChannels do not apply to switches with lite firmware The following figure shows two EtherChannels Two full duplex 10 100 1000 Mbps ports on Switches A and C create an EtherChannel with a bandwidth of up to 4 Gbps between both switches Similarly two full duplex 10 100 ports on Switches B and D create an EtherChannel with a bandwidth of up to 400 Mbps between both switches If one of the ports in the EtherChannel becomes unavailable traffic is sent through the remaining ports within the EtherChannel Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Figure 3 EtherChannel Example Switch B NU Management ite AN Internet 3 Access Router with Firewall Sit auc You can co
191. for the spanning tree topology e Designated A forwarding port elected for every switched LAN segment e Alternate A blocked port providing an alternate path to the root bridge in the spanning tree e Backup A blocked port in a loopback configuration The switch that has all of its ports as the designated role or as the backup role is the root switch The switch that has at least one of its ports in the designated role is called the designated switch Spanning tree forces redundant data paths into a standby blocked state Ifa network segment in the spanning tree fails and a redundant path exists the spanning tree algorithm recalculates the spanning tree topology and activates the standby path Switches send and receive spanning tree frames called bridge protocol data units BPDUs at regular intervals The switches do not forward these frames but use them to construct a loop free path BPD Us contain information about the sending switch and its ports including switch and MAC addresses switch priority port priority and path cost Spanning tree uses this information to elect the root switch and root port for the switched network and the root port and designated port for each switched segment You can choose one of these options e The default Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP also known as Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MST e Per YLAN Spanning Tree Protocol PVST e Rapid Per VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol RPVST TIP If y
192. from anywhere in your network through a Web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer Hardware Requirements Attribute Requirement Processor speed 1 GHz or faster 32 bit or 64 bit RAM 1 GB 32 bit or 2 GB 64 bit Available hard drive space 16 GB 32 bit or 20 GB 64 bit Number of colors 256 Resolution 1024 x 768 Font size Small Software Requirements Web Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 0 10 0 or 11 0 with JavaScript enabled Mozilla Firefox 25 or 26 with JavaScript enabled The Device Manager Web interface verifies the browser version when starting a session to be sure that the browser is supported TIP So that the Device Manager Web interface runs properly disable any pop up blockers or proxy settings in your browser software and any wireless clients running on your computer or laptop Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 About the Switches Chapter 1 Studio 5000 Environment You can manage the switch by using the Logix Designer application in the Studio 5000 environment The Logix Designer application is IEC 61131 3 compliant and offers relay ladder structured text function block diagram and sequential function chart editors for you to develop application programs Hardware Requirements Attribute Requirement Processor speed Pentium ll 450 MHz min Pentium Ill 733 MHz or better recommended RAM 128 MB min 256 MB recommended Free hard drive space 3 GB Optical drives DVD Video
193. function team or application This segmentation is without regard to the physical location of the users and resources For example VLANs can be based on the departments in your company or by sets of users who communicate mostly with each other The switch ships with a default VLAN to which each switch port initially belongs The switch supports a maximum of 255 VLANs including the default VLAN Every VLAN is identified by its name and ID number The default VLAN is named default The ID can be from 1 1001 and 1005 4094 where 1 is the default ID You can assign switch ports to either the default VLAN or to VLANs that you have created The default VLAN alone can be sufficient based on the size and requirements of your network We recommend that you first determine your VLAN needs before creating VLANs With custom Smartports you can specify the type of VLAN you want to implement on that port The default VLAN is also the management VLAN After the initial setup you can create VLANs and designate any VLAN on the switch as the management VLAN The management VLAN provides administrative access to the switch You must assign one of the switch ports to the management VLAN Otherwise you do not have administrative access to the switch Initially all ports are assigned to the management VLAN You can assign all ports regardless of their Smartport role to the default VLAN default Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN
194. gh CDP power negotiation messages the initial power allocation can be adjusted The switch monitors and tracks requests for power and grants power only when it is available The switch tracks its power budget which is the amount of power available on each PoE port The switch performs power accounting calculations when a port is granted or denied power to keep the power budget up to date After power is applied to a PoE port the switch uses CDP if CDP is supported by the powered Cisco end device to determine the actual power consumption requirement of the connected powered devices and adjusts the power budget accordingly The switch processes a request and either grants or denies power If the request is granted the switch updates the power budget If the request is denied the switch verifies that power to the port is turned off generates a syslog message and updates the status indicators Powered devices can also negotiate with the module for more power Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Software Features Chapter 3 If the switch detects a fault caused by an undervoltage overvoltage overtemperature oscillator fault or short circuit condition it turns off power to the port generates a syslog message and updates the power budget and status indicators Power Management Modes PoE ports support these modes e Auto default The port automatically detects if the connected device requires powe
195. gs 146 Synchronization Clock mode 145 PTP End to end Transparent mode 145 PTP Precision Time Protocol 100 rear panel clearance 32 58 Receive Detail tab dashboard 171 recovery firmware upgrade 241 switch software 240 redundancy EtherChannel 99 relays wiring 51 removing SFP modules 48 REP 107 open segment 108 ring segment 109 segments characteristics 109 verify link integrity 110 REP Admin VLAN 152 REP segments 107 configure 151 reset troubleshoot 240 residence time 145 Resilient Ethernet Protocol see REP 107 roles 105 RSLinx software 189 RSTP features 149 RSWho 189 289 Index 290 S save and restore 234 SD card install or remove 33 59 synchronize configuration 184 synchronize IOS files 184 SD Flash Sync 233 SDM template 181 security configure for ports 162 violations 98 segment ID 152 segment topology change notices See also STCNs 152 SFP modules bale clasp latch removal 48 cables 280 connecting to 55 Smartport roles applying 125 changing VLAN memberships 126 customization 126 optimize ports 83 mismatch prevention 84 Smartport roles and NAT 105 Smartport roles and VLANs 203 SNMP configuring 165 default 165 MIBs supported 112 snooping IGMP 93 software features customization DHCP persistence settings 139 DHCP server settings 137 Smartport roles 83 troubleshoot firmware upgrade 183 software requirements Device Manager 26 Spanning Tree Protocol 107 See also Rapid Spanning Tree
196. he Global tab On the Global tab you can add edit or delete instances If you choose PVST or Rapid PVST mode you can enable or disable STP on each instance o Spanning Tree STP Settings I Globa Port Fast Spanning Tree Mode MSTP T Submit Add f Edit W Delete Instance VLANs Mapped Ono 1 199 201 4094 Od 200 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 149 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface PortFast Settings To enable PortFast and related features click the PortFast tab On the PortFast tab you can change the way that STP is implemented on individual ports o Spanning Tree STP Settings Global P or yg BPDU Filtering L Enable BPDU Guard Enable Submit Per Interface Port Fast Table Port Name Port Tyne Enable Port Fast Fal 1 Trunk al Fal 2 Dynamic auto F Fal 3 Dynamic auto F Fal 4 Dynamic auto F PortFast features are typically enabled only on access ports which connect to devices such as personal computers access points and servers that are not expected to send bridge protocol data units BPDUs These features are typically not enabled on ports that connect to switches because spanning tree loops might occur BPDU Features Switches exchange special frames called BPDUs to communicate network information to track changes and to create the STP topology Because transmitted BPDUs reveal network information and received BPD Us ca
197. he Switch Notes 242 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Appendix A Module defined Data Types Topic Page Module defined Input Data Type 6 port Gb switches 245 Module defined Output Data Type 6 port Gb switches 246 Module defined Input Data Type 6 port switches 246 Module defined Output Data Type 6 port switches 247 Module defined Input Data Type 8 port switches 247 Module defined Output Data Type 8 port switches 248 Module defined Input Data Type 10 port Gb switches 249 Module defined Output Data Type 10 port Gb switches 250 Module defined Input Data Type 10 port switches 250 Module defined Output Data Type 10 port switches 252 Module defined Input Data Type 16 port switches 252 Module defined Output Data Type 16 port switches 254 Module defined Input Data Type 18 port Gb switches 257 Module defined Output Data Type 18 port Gb switches 260 Module defined Output Data Type 20 port Gb switches 263 Module defined Input Data Type 20 port switches 264 Module defined Output Data Type 20 port switches 266 Module defined Input Data Type 24 port switches 267 Module defined Output Data Type 24 port switches 270 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 243 Appendix A 244 Module defined Data Types In the Logix Designer application predefined tags for Input and Outpuc data types have a structure corresponding to the switch selected when it was added to the
198. he Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Description The number of the switch port including port type such as Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet and the specific port number e Gi 1is the gigabit port 1 of the switch Fal 1 is Fast Ethernet port 1 on the switch The description of the switch port We recommend that you provide a port description to help identify the port during monitoring and troubleshooting The description can be the location of the connected device or the name of the person using the connected device The state of the switch port The default is Enabled You can change this setting on the Edit Physical Port window by checking or clearing the Administrative checkbox We recommend disabling the port if the port is not in use and is not attached to a device An example of when to change this setting is during troubleshooting You can troubleshoot a suspected unauthorized connection by administratively disabling the port The operating speed of the switch port You can choose Auto autonegotiation if the connected device can negotiate the link speed with the switch port The default is Auto We recommend that you use the default so that the speed setting on the switch port automatically matches the setting on the connected device Change the switch port speed if the connected device requires a specific speed An example of when to change this setting is during troubleshooting If you
199. he positive wire the one connected to DC to the positive terminal on the DC power source and connect the other end of the return wire the one connected to DC to the return terminal on the DC power source ATTENTION If multiple power sources are used do not exceed the specified isolation voltage Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 45 Chapter2 Switch Installation Attach the PoE Power Connector This procedure applies only to switches with PoE ports 1 Insert the power connector into the DC input terminal block on the switch front panel 2 Use a screwdriver to tighten the captive screws on the sides of the power connector materials used in the relay Periodically inspect the relay and check for any ATTENTION Exposure to some chemicals can degrade the sealing properties of degradation Install an SFP Module optional WARNING When you insert or remove the small form factor pluggable SFP optical transceiver while power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding 1783 SFP1GSX or 1783 SFP1GLX SFPs ATTENTION We strongly recommend that you do not install or remove the SFP module with fiber optic cables attached to it because of the potential damage to the cables the cable connector or the optical interfaces in the SF
200. he ring terminal lug and use a crimping tool to crimp the terminal to the wire If you are using two ring terminals repeat this action for the second ring terminal 32273 M 4 Slide the ground screw through the terminal 62 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 5 Insert the ground screw into the functional ground screw opening on the front panel U gt 32498 6 Use a ratcheting torque screwdriver to tighten the ground screws and ring terminal lugs to the switch front panel to 0 4 Nem 3 5 lbein Do not exceed the recommended torque 7 Attach the other end of the ground wire to a grounded bare metal surface such as a ground bus a grounded DIN rail or a grounded bare rack Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 63 Chapter 2 64 Switch Installation Connect the Switch to a DC Power Source You must supply a power solution for the device An IP67 rated cordset or patchcord with a female end 4 pin mini connector is required to provide power to the switch Rockwell Automation offers a Bulletin 1607 IP67 rated power supply to provide 24V DC power to the switch Ethernet communication and control power cables are available separately Power over Ethernet For switches with Power over Ethernet PoE capability PoE p
201. he switch by using the Device Manager Web interface supplied with the switch For simplicity most of the illustrations in this chapter show a 6 port switch Access the Device Manager To access the Device Manager Web interface follow these steps Web Interface 1 Launch a Web browser on your workstation 2 Enter the switch IP address in the Web browser and click Enter 3 Enter the user name and password Rockwell E Stratix 5700 y ee Automation AB Allen Bradley Device Manager Switch RO E Uptime 1 day 5 hours 51 minutes Next refresh in 22 seconds Front Panel Switch Information View Status HostName R2S8 IP Address 10 208 60 5 MAC Address 00 1D 9C B6 61 00 Product ID 1783 BMS06TA License Level FULL CIP Revision 4 001 CIP Serial Number SO0800AD Serial Number FDO1624T04A Version ID AO Software 15 2 1 EY Contact Move the pointer over the ports for more j information Location Switch Health Port Utilization 50 All Errors Receive Transmit 20 80 10 8 i 90 20 80 10 5 90 0 E 100 Errors BJ Receive amp Transmit TEMPERATURE Pad Thursday January 23 2014 04 21 PM 118 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Dashboard Overview Table 9 Front Panel Status Indicators Indicator Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 You can use the dashboard to monitor switch status and performance The Dashboa
202. he switch or the network administrator and the switch location The system name and the system contact information appear in the Switch Information area on the Dashboard To configure SNMP from the Configure menu choose SNMP Community Strings Traps View Group Users Submit SNMP Host Add f Edit W Delete IP No data available Community Port Version Type Community strings are passwords to the switch Management Information Base MIB You can create community strings that provide a remote manager read only or read write access to the switch To create modify and delete community strings click the Community Strings tab O security SNMP Enable SNMP C Submit System Options Traps View Group Users add f Edit X Delete Community RWRO O Read only ro O Read write rw A read only community string enables the switch to validate Get read only requests from a network management station If you set the SNMP read community users can access MIB objects but cannot change them A read write community string enables the switch to validate Set read write requests from a network management station Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 165 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Configure Alarm Settings 166 Use SNMP Management Applications You can use SNMP management applications such as IntraVue or HP OpenView to configure and manage
203. he value can be from 50 500 000 000 nanoseconds The default is 50 000 nanoseconds We recommend against setting the sync limit below the default 50 000 nanoseconds Use values below 50 000 nanoseconds only in networks with a very high precision Grandmaster clock These networks have a critical need to keep very sensitive devices synchronized Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 147 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Enable and Configure Routing 148 Before you can enable routing you must reallocate switch memory for routing as described on page 181 To enable routing from the Configure menu choose Routing o Network Routing Enable Routing Gateway 0 0 0 0 Submit Static Routes _ Destination Network Destination Mask Next Hop Router Ll 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 208 60 3 inin ES From the Routing window you can enable connected routing only or both static and connected routing When static routing is enabled connected routing is enabled by default For more information about these routing types refer to Routing on page 113 Enable Connected Routing Only To enable connected routing only check Enable Routing and click Submit No further configuration is required for connected routing Enable Both Static and Connected Routing To enable both static and connected routing follow these steps 1 Check Enable Routing and click Submit 2 Con
204. heck the checkbox next to each VLAN to assign to the instance For more information about VLAN assignments see page 105 154 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 5 In the Private to Public area click Add Row complete the fields and click Save Field Description Private IP Address Type a private IP address e Totranslate a single address type the existing address for the device on the private subnet e To translate a range of addresses type the first address in the range of sequential addresses To translate addresses in a subnet type the existing starting address for a device on the private subnet This address must correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Starting Private Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 or 192 168 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 32 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 16 Public IP Address Type
205. her devices This prevents IP address conflicts between the switch and another device The IP address and associated subnet mask are unique identifiers for the switch in a network e The IP address format is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be from 0 255 e The subnet mask is the network address that identifies the subnetwork subnet to which the switch belongs Subnets are used to segment the devices in a network into smaller groups The default is 255 255 255 0 This field is enabled only if the IP Assignment mode is Static Make sure that the IP address that you assign to the switch is not being used by another device in your network The IP address and the default gateway cannot be the same The IP address for the default gateway A gateway is a router or a dedicated network device that enables the switch to communicate with devices in other networks or subnetworks The default gateway IP address must be part of the same subnet as the switch IP address The switch IP address and the default gateway IP address cannot be the same If all of your devices are in the same network and a default gateway is not used you do not need to enter an IP address in this field This field is enabled only if the IP assignment mode is Static You must specify a default gateway if your network management station and the switch are in different networks or subnetworks Otherwise the switch and your networ
206. her sources of UV radiation e This equipment shall be mounted in an ATEX certified enclosure with a minimum ingress protection rating of at least IP54 as defined in IEC60529 and used in an environment of not more than Pollution Degree 2 as defined in IEC 60664 1 when applied in Zone 2 environments The enclosure must have a tool removable cover or door e This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation e Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 140 of the rated voltage when applied in Zone 2 environments e Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product e Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous A Installation Guidelines this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could WARNING If you connect or disconnect Ethernet cables with power applied to cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding At the end of its life this equipment should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste N ATTENTION The alarm port cables are not to exceed 10 0 m 32 81 ft When determining where to place the switch observe these guidelin
207. iagnostic counters per port Ethernet interface counters 10 Ethernet media counters 12 190 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 e Configuration data requires password IP address method DHCP static IP address subnet mask default gateway all if static Host name Contact name Geographic location Port configuration per port enable disable autonegotiate forced speed duplex Authorized MAC ID per port Unicast rate limiting threshold per port in packets per second bits per second or percentage Multicast rate limiting threshold in packets per second bits per sec or percentage Broadcast rate limiting threshold in packets per second bits per sec or percentage e Smartport assignment per port role and VLAN e Save and restore of switch configuration via File Obj Add a Switch to the 0 To add the switch to the controller s I O tree follow these steps Configuration Tree a asa d d Puur IMPORTANT These steps are required before you can go online to configure and monitor the switch 1 Open the project file for the controller that monitors the switch 2 Select the Ethernet module through which the controller communicates with the switch In this example the switch communicates through a 1769 L32E CompactLogix EtherNet IP controller 3 8 T O Configuration
208. ified in the DHCP Pool Name field Configure VLANs To create modify and delete VLANs from the Configure menu choose VLAN Management lt Network VLAN Management To add or edit ports in a VLAN use the Physical Port Settings page VTP Mode Server lt Add f Edit W Delete VLAN ID Name Ports VLAN Status IP address D 1 default Fal Fai 3 Fal 4 Fa1 5 Fal 6 Active The default VLAN ID is 1 and the name for the management VLAN is default The default VLAN alone can be sufficient based on the size and requirements of your network We recommend that you determine your VLAN needs before creating VLANs To create a VLAN you must give the VLAN a name and a unique ID number You can modify the name of a VLAN but not its number You cannot modify or delete the default VLAN After creating VLANs you can then assign ports to VLANs Before assigning ports to VLANs make sure that each port has the appropriate port role Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 141 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Assign Ports to VLANs To assign ports to VLANs use the Edit Physical Ports window as described on page 132 Edit Physical Port Port Name Description l OE Range 1 18 Characters Administrative Enable Speed _ Auto Duplex _ Auto Auto MDIX Enable Media Type Administrative Mode___Trunk Access VLAN Allowed VLAN All VLANs Owam iv
209. in the target device If necessary reconfigure and restart the switch or the target device Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 55 Chapter2 Switch Installation Connect to a Dual purpose Port A dual purpose port is a single port with two interfaces one for an RJ45 cable and another for an approved SFP module Only one interface can be active at a time If both interfaces are connected the SFP module has priority rubber caps from the fiber optic cable until you are ready to connect the cable The plugs and caps protect the SFP module ports and cables from contamination and ambient light ATTENTION Do not remove the rubber plugs from the SFP module port or the To connect to a dual purpose port follow these steps 1 Connect an RJ45 connector to the 10 100 1000 port or install an SFP module into the SFP module slot and connect a cable to the SFP module port RJ45 Connector 32296 M 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the other device By default the switch detects whether an RJ45 connector or SFP module is connected to a dual purpose port and configures the port accordingly You can change this setting and configure the port to recognize only an RJ45 connector or only an SFP module by using the media type interface configuration command For more information refer to the appropriate documentation at http www Cisco com 56 Rockwell Automation Publication 178
210. ing properly on that switch port Disabled PIP is not enabled on the switch port When at least one switch port is PTP enabled the Forward mode is selected by default You can enable or disable PTP on a per port basis kwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Table 16 PTP Fields continued Field Delay Request Interval Announce Timeout Announce Interval Sync Interval Sync Fault Limit Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Description The time interval recommended to connected devices to send delay request messages when the switch port is in the master state e 1 means half second e Omeans 1 second 1 means 2 seconds 2 means 4 seconds 3 means 8 seconds 4 means 16 seconds 5 means 32 seconds 6 means 64 seconds The default is 5 32 seconds The number of announce intervals that must pass without receipt of an announce message from the Grandmaster clock before the switch selects a new Grandmaster clock The number can be from 2 10 The default is 3 The time interval for sending announce messages e Qmeans 1 second e 1 means 2 seconds e 2means 4 seconds e 3 means 8 seconds e 4means16 seconds The default is 1 2 seconds The time interval for sending synchronization messages e 1 means half second e Omeans 1 second e 1 means 2 seconds The default is 0 1 second The maximum clock offset before PTP attempts to reacguire synchronization T
211. ing the switch interrupts connectivity of your devices to the network Restart the Switch from the Device Manager Web Interface From the Device Manager Web interface on the Restart Reset dialog box click Restart the Switch This option restarts the switch without turning off power The Device Manager Web interface is unavailable during the restart process When the process completes the switch displays the Device Manager Web interface If you do not know the switch IP address follow the procedure in the Access Direct Managed Mode section on page 237 to access Direct Managed mode Restart the Switch from the Logix Designer Application From Module Properties dialog box within the Logix Designer application do the following 1 Click the Module Info tab 2 Click Reset Module A password prompt appears 3 Enter your password and click Enter Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 239 Chapter6 Troubleshoot the Switch Recover the Switch Firmware and Restore Factory Defaults 240 Reset the Switch to Factory Defaults ATTENTION Resetting the switch deletes all customized switch N settings including the IP address and returns the switch to its factory default The same software image is retained To manage the switch or to display the device manager you need to reconfigure the basic switch settings as described in Chapter 4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface and use the n
212. ion PortFa1_ 12Utilization PortFa1_ 13Utilization Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 265 AppendixA Module defined Data Types Module defined Output Data Type 20 port switches 266 AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Default Display Style Valid Values PortFa1_ 14Utilization PortFa1_ 15Utilization PortFa1_ 16Utilization PortFa1_ 17Utilization PortFa1_ 18Utilization PortFa1_ 19Utilization PortFa1_ 20Utilization MajorAlarmRelay BOOL AlarmRelay 0 MulticastGroupsActive DINT AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_MANAGED 0 0 Member Name Default Display Style Valid Values AllPortsDisabled PortFa1_ 1Disable PortFa1_ 2Disable PortFa1_3Disable PortFa1_ 4Disable PortFa1_5Disable PortFa1_6Disable PortFa1_ 7Disable PortFa1_8Disable PortFa1_9Disable PortFa1_ 10Disable PortFa1_ 11Disable PortFa1_ 12Disable PortFa1_ 13Disable PortFa1_ 14Disable PortFa1_ 15Disable PortFa1_ 16Disable PortFa1_ 17Disable PortFa1_ 18Disable PortFa1_ 19Disable PortFa1_ 20Disable Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 DisablePort 0 DisablePort 1 DisablePort 2 DisablePort 3 DisablePort 4 DisablePort 5 DisablePort 6 DisablePort 7 DisablePort 8 DisablePort 9 DisablePort 10 DisablePort 11 DisablePort 12 DisablePort 13 DisablePort 14 DisablePort 15 DisablePort 16 DisablePort 17 DisablePort 18 DisablePort 19 DisablePort 20 Module defined Input Data Type 24 port switches M
213. ion Product Compatibility and Selection and Download Center t Tools amp Resources Support o Get help determining how different products interact Compare features and capabilities between different series of products and associated firmware versions The Product Compatibility and Downloads Center can help you find product related downloads includir Literature Library Product Resources firmware release notes associated software drivers tools and utilities Literature Library Product Compatibility amp Compatibility Scenarios v Get Downloads gt Find Answers gt Download Center Product Catalogs Product Certifications Multi Product Compare Silver Series need to upgrade one or more products and I want to check compatibility between the new product s and the other Product Data Sheets product s in my system bl naarn Mara 2 From the Compatibility Scenarios tab or the Get Downloads tab search for and choose your product Start by selecting products Product Search All Families search by name or description Example 1756 L671 LES Logi Ethemef You can also filter by product category or family All Categories rm 3 Click the download icon EA to access product release notes 12 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Preface Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation Resource Desc
214. ion of switches with Power over Ethernet PoE PoE switch dimensions PoE port descriptions AWG wire size for connecting external grounding screw Wire the PoE power source Attach the Poe power connector Connect to PoE Ports Express setup and SD card Port numbering on switches with PoE Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 283 AppendixD History of Changes PoE feature descriptions Configure PoE via the Device Manager Web interface PoE port connector pinouts and cable specifications 284 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 History of Changes Appendix D 1783 UM004B EN P Change June 2013 Studio 5000 Logix Designer application is the rebranding of RSLogix 5000 software Description of 1783 BMS10CGN and 1783 BMS20 GN switches Network address translation NAT software feature gt s s s amp lt 5 gt gt Port numbering for 1783 BMS10CGN and 1783 BMS20CGN switches Overview of NAT Configure NAT via the Device Manager Web interface Monitor NAT statistics via the Device Manager Web interface Configure NAT via the Logix Designer application Monitor NAT diagnostics via the Logix Designer application Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 285 AppendixD History of Changes 286 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Numerics 10 100 ports cable lengths 32 58 connecting to 52 66 10 100 1000 ports cable length
215. iption You connect the DC power and alarm signals to the switch through two front panel connectors One connector provides primary DC power Pwr A and a second connector Pwr B provides secondary power The two connectors are physically identical and are on the right side of the front panel The 6 pin alarm connector provides an interface for an output alarm relay and two input alarms The output alarm can be activated for environmental power supply and port status alarm conditions and can be configured to indicate an alarm with one normally open and one normally closed form C contact From the CLI you can configure the output alarm to be normally energized or normally de energized The input alarm terminals can be used to activate alarms for any conditions external to the switch The switch can operate with a single power source or with dual power sources When both power sources are operational the switch draws power from the DC source with the higher voltage If one of the two power sources fail the other continues to power the switch For configuring monitoring and managing the switch you can connect a switch to a computer through the console port and a RJ45 to DB 9 adapter cable or a mini USB cable neither cables are supplied with the switch The mini USB driver is available in the firmware download section at http www rockwellautomation com The two dual purpose uplink ports available on some models can each be configured for RJ4
216. irect Managed mode 237 firmware upgrade 183 241 IP address problems 235 reset switch 240 speed duplex and autonegotiation 237 switch 235 switch performance 237 switch software 240 wrong IP address 235 U unicast storm 95 upgrade firmware 183 V verify switch operation 34 60 verifying switch operation 35 60 View list 121 VLAN memberships changing 126 prereguisite 126 VLANs assign to NAT instance 105 154 157 217 221 default VLAN 90 grouping different users 92 isolate traffic 92 management VLAN 90 W warnings functional ground lug 62 WINS server1 and 2 139 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Index 291 Index Notes 292 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs You can also visit our Support Center at https rockwellautomation custhelp com for software updates support chats and forums technical information FAOs and to sign up for producc notification updates In addition we offer multiple support programs for installation configuration and troubleshooting For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellau
217. ired by the other modes see below The switches at both ends of the link must be configured in On mode PAgP This mode enables Port Aggregation Protocol PAgP a Cisco proprietary protocol The port responds to requests to create EtherChannels but does not initiate such negotiations This silent mode is recommended when a port is connected to a device such as a file server or a packet analzyer that is unlikely to send PAgP packets A port in the Auto mode can form an EtherChannel with another port in the Desirable mode PAgP non silent This mode is the same as Auto mode but is recommended when the port is connected to a device that is expected to be active in initiating EtherChannels A port in the Auto mode can form an EtherChannel with another port in the Desirable mode PAgP Desirable This mode enables Port Aggregation Protocol PAgP a Cisco proprietary protocol The port initiates negotiations to form EtherChannels by sending PAgP packets to other ports This silent mode is recommended when a port is connected to a device such as a file server or a packet analzyer that is unlikely to send PAgP packets A port in the Desirable mode can form an EtherChannel with another port that is in the Desirable or Auto mode PAgP Desirable non silent This mode is the same as Desirable mode but is recommended when the port is connected to a device that is expected to be active in initiating EtherChannels LACP Active This mode enables
218. is port is determined by the following e Ifall downlink ports are not connected to devices or if multiple downlink ports are connected to devices the first available downlink port is selected as the Direct Managed mode port e If only one downlink port is connected to a device that port is selected as the Direct Managed mode port If there is no available switch downlink port to which to connect your computer or laptop disconnect a device from one of the switch downlink ports and then press the Setup button again until the Setup status indicator and the port status indicator blink green 2 Use a Category 5 Ethernet cable to connect your computer or laptop to the switch port with the blinking port status indicator 3 Wait until the port status indicators on the switch and your computer or laptop are solid green The solid green port status indicators means a successful connection between the two devices 4 Start a Web browser on your computer or laptop A password prompt followed by the Device Manager Web interface page appears If the Device Manager Web interface does not appear make sure that any pop up blockers or proxy settings in your browser software are disabled and that any wireless clients running on your computer or laptop are disabled If the Device Manager Web interface still does not appear enter a URL in your browser such as http www rockwellautomation com The browser redirects to the Device Manage
219. is process takes approximately 18 20 seconds 2 Release the Express Setup pushbutton Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Troubleshoot the Switch Chapter 6 3 Wait for the switch to restart The Express Setup indicator begins flashing when the switch has completed restarting The switch has now been returned to factory defaults 4 Set up the switch as described in ArmorStratix 5700 Switch Installation on page 57 5 Refer to Troubleshoot a Firmware Upgrade on page 241 and follow the procedure to upgrade the firmware Troubleshoota If you attempted to upgrade the switch firmware but received a message that the Firmware Upgrade upgrade failed make sure that you still have access to the switch If you still have switch access follow these steps 1 Make sure that you downloaded the correct tar file from http www rockwellautomation com 2 Ifyou downloaded the correct tar file refresh your Device Manager Web interface browser session to make sure that there is connectivity between the switch and your computer or laptop or network drive e Ifyou have connectivity to the switch and the Device Manager Web interface retry the upgrade e Ifyou do not have connectivity to the switch and the Device Manager Web interface refer to Recover the Switch Firmware and Restore Factory Defaults on page 240 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 241 Chapter6 Troubleshoot t
220. issue Table 22 Syslog Fields Field Description The date and time the event occurred Use the Express Setup window to connect the device to an NTP server Time settings are lost if the switch loses power Time Stamp Severity Level The type and severity of the event Description The description of the problem including the port on which the problem was detected Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 177 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Use Express Setup The network settings enable the switch to operate with its standard default settings and to be managed through the Device Manager Web interface These to Change Switch Settings settings were set during the initial setup Change these settings if you want to move the switch to a different management VLAN or to a different network To update the switch IP information from the Admin menu choose Express Setup lt Device Management Express Setup Network Settings Host Name R454 Management Interface VLAN 500 IP Assignment Mode Static DHCP IP Address 10 208 60 101 Default Gateway 10 208 60 1 NTF Server Rene IP Address Same As Management VLAN 7 Telnet CIP and Enable Password leave it blank if no change Confirm Password Submit Field Description Network Settings Host Name The name of the device Management Interface VLAN ID The name and ID
221. ist Use DHCP persistence when the attached device has a specific role to play and when other devices know its IP address If the device is replaced the replacement device is assigned the same IP address and the other devices in the network require no reconfiguration When the DHCP persistence feature is enabled the switch acts as a DHCP server for other devices on the same subnet including devices connected to other switches If the switch receives a DHCP request it responds with any unassigned IP addresses in its pool To prevent this from happening check the Reserve Only box on the DHCP window This prevents the switch from responding when it receives a request When DHCP persistence is enabled on a port and a DHCP request is made from a connected device on that port the switch assigns the IP address for that port in the DHCP window It also broadcasts the DHCP request to the remainder of the network If another DHCP server with available addresses is on the network and receives this request it can try and respond This can override the initial IP address assigned by the switch depending on how the end device behaves takes first IP address response or the last To prevent the IP address from being overridden enable DHCP snooping on the appropriate VLAN Doing this blocks the broadcast of this DHCP request so that no other server including another Stratix switch with DHCP persistence enabled responds Rockwell Automation Publication
222. ization PortFa1_ 1Utilization PortFa1_2Utilization PortFa1_3Utilization PortFa1_4Utilization PortFa1_5Utilization PortFa1_6Utilization PortFa1_7Utilization PortFa1_ 8Utilization MajorAlarmRelay MulticastGroupsActive AB STRATIX_5700_8PORT_MANAGED 0 0 Default Display Style Valid Values Member Name AllPortsDisabled PortFa1_ Disable PortFa1_2Disable PortFa1_3Disable PortFa1_4Disable PortFa1_5Disable PortFa1_6Disable PortFa1_7Disable PortFa1_8Disable Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 UnauthorizedDevice 8 ThresholdExceeded 0 ThresholdExceeded 1 ThresholdExceeded 2 ThresholdExceeded 3 ThresholdExceeded 4 ThresholdExceeded 5 ThresholdExceeded 6 ThresholdExceeded 5 ThresholdExceeded 6 AlarmRelay 0 DisablePort 0 DisablePort 1 DisablePort 2 DisablePort 3 DisablePort 4 DisablePort 5 DisablePort 6 DisablePort 7 DisablePort 8 Module defined Input Data Type 10 port Gb switches Module defined Data Types Appendix A AB STRATIX_5700_10PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Valid Values AnyPortConnected LinkStatus 0 PortFa1_ 1Connected LinkStatus 1 PortFa1_ 2Connected LinkStatus 2 PortFa1_ 3Connected LinkStatus 3 PortFa1_ 4Connected LinkStatus 4 PortFa1_5Connected LinkStatus 5 PortFa1_ 6Connected LinkStatus 6 PortFa1_ 7Connected LinkStatus 7 PortFa1_ 8Connected LinkStatus 8 PortGi1_ 1Connected LinkStatus 9 PortGi1_ 2Connected LinkStatus 10 AnyPortUnauthorizedDevice Unauthorized
223. k management station cannot communicate with each other The IP address of the Network Time Protocol NTP server NTP is a networking protocol for clock synchronization between computer systems over packet switched variable latency data networks Enter the user name The password for the switch can have up to 63 alphanumeric characters can start with a number is case sensitive and can have embedded spaces The password cannot be a single digit it cannot contain a or a tab and it does not allow spaces at the beginning or the end The default is switch To complete initial setup you must change the password from the default password switch This password is also used as the Control Industrial Protocol CIP security password We recommend that you provide a password to the switch to secure access to the device manager Advanced Settings The VLAN on which Common Industrial Protocol CIP is enabled The CIP VLAN can be the same as the management VLAN or you can isolate CIP traffic on another VLAN that is already configured on this device The IP address and subnet mask for the CPI VLAN if the CIP VLAN is different from the management VLAN The format is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be from 0 255 Make sure that the IP address that you assign to this device is not being used by another device in your network Indicates whether the settings for the CIP VLAN are the same as the
224. lations configured for devices on the public subnet The total number of translations configured for the instance The number of ARP packets that have been fixed up for the instance The number of ICMP packets that have been fixed up for the instance The total number of ARP and ICMP packets that have been fixed up for the instance The number of packets with untranslated unicast traffic for the instance The number of packets with multicast traffic for the instance The number of packets with IGMP traffic for the instance To review the REP topology for one or all network segments from the Monitor menu choose REP To display an archived REP topology click the Archived Topology tab and then select the segment ID G status REP Archived Topology segment D Current Topolagy Switch Name Port No data available Edge Role Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 173 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Monitor CIP Status Common Industrial Protocol CIP is an application layer messaging protocol used by various industrial automation and control devices to communicate as part of a control system CIP is the application layer for the EtherNet IP network Stratix switches contain an EtherNet IP server that enables the switch to be part of the industrial automation and control system for basic management and monitoring The CIP Status window displays informatio
225. le Properties dialog box DHCP Pool Display From the keyboard press Alt N The New button is available only when the switch is online and the Enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP checkbox is selected The New button is dimmed when the switch is offline and the Enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP checkbox is cleared Click to apply attribute changes on this dialog box to the switch Only those attributes that have been modified are applied to the switch The Enter Password dialog box can appear If an error occurs while setting an attribute the Set operation is terminated and all subsequent attribute values are not applied to the switch Additionally the Set button remains available The Set button is available only when the switch is online and any of the attribute values have changed The Set button is dimmed when the switch is offline Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 211 Chapter 5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment DHCP Address Assignment You can view and configure DHCP persistence from the DHCP Address Assignment tab With DHCP persistence you can assign a specific IP address to each port so that the device attached to a specific port receives the same IP address Port Configuration Smartports amp VLANs Port Thresholds Port Security Port Status DHCP Pool Display DHCP Address Assignment SD Flash Syne Save Fiestore A Reserve and preassign
226. le for the switches e Boundary Clock e Transparent Clock e Forwarding PTP is disabled when Forwarding mode is selected For more information on these modes refer to the Converged Plantwide Ethernet Design and Implementation Guide publication ENET T D001 The default PTP mode is Forwarding mode Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Network Address Translation NAT Switch Software Features Chapter 3 NAT is a service that translates one IP address to another IP address via a NAT configured switch The switch translates the source and destination addresses within data packets as traffic passes between subnets This service is useful if you need to reuse IP addresses throughout a network For example NAT makes it possible for devices that share a single IP address on a private subnet to be segmented into multiple identical private subnets while maintaining unique identities on the public SGER The implementation of NAT in the Stratix 5700 switch is distinct in these ways e One to one NAIT The switch uses one to one NAT rather than one to many NAT One to one NAT requires that each source address translates to one unique destination address Unlike one to many NAT multiple source addresses cannot share the same destination address e Layer 2 implementation The switch s implementation of NAT operates at the Layer 2 MAC level At this level the switch can replace only IP addresses and
227. lity for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence gt gt IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures ARC FLASH HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a motor control c
228. ll devices in the system have the same values Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 145 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Table 16 PTP Fields Field Mode Priority 1 Priority 2 Clock Identity Offset from Master ns Port Name State Enable 146 O Network PTP Mode Priority1 Priority2 Clock Identity To configure PTP from the Configure menu choose PTP Once you choose a mode you can edit the settings for each port The parameters depend on the selected mode You can configure per port PTP when the switch is in Boundary mode or End to end Transparent mode Boundary v Offset From Master ns Submit Port Name State No data available Roc Enable Delay Request Interval Announce Timeout Announce Interval Sync Interval Sync Fault Limit Description Choose a PTP mode e Boundary Synchronizes all switch ports with the Grandmaster clock by using the IEEE 1588 V 2 Boundary clock mechanism e End to End Transparent Calculates and adds the switch delay into the PTP packet by using the IEEE 1588 V2 End to End Transparent clock mechanism In this mode all switch ports are PTP enabled In boundary mode one or more switch ports can be PTP enabled You can enable or disable PTP on a per port basis e Forward default Passes PTP packets through without interference The switch used to override the default criteria such as cl
229. ll of the addresses in the public subnet or a portion of the public subnet Type the number of addresses to translate This field is available only if you choose Range in the Type field Valid values 1 128 Default value 1 IMPORTANT Each address in the range counts as one translation entry The switch supports a maximum of 128 translation entries Type the subnet mask for the addresses to translate Valid values e Class B 255 255 0 0 e Class C 255 255 255 0 e Portion of Class C 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 provides 128 addresses per translation entry provides 64 addresses per translation entry provides 32 addresses per translation entry provides 16 addresses per translation entry DO PAES aAa 8 Optional To configure traffic permits and packet fixups proceed to Configure Traffic Permits and Fixups below 9 On the NAT window click Submit Configure Traffic Permits and Fixups Use caution when configuring traffic permits and fixups We recommend you use the default values To configure traffic permits or fixups follow these steps 1 Click the Advanced tab ADD Edit Nat Instance x General Public to Private Advanced Traffic Permits Incoming Outgoing Non Translated blocked blocked Multicast blocked blocked IGMP blocked blocked Fix up Packets ARP ICMP Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 161 Chapter4 M
230. llowing example E1 or E2 can be configured as the primary no neighbor port Figure 8 Ring Topology Example an o o gt a REP Not Supported bul o REP Ports Configured at Transit Ports er 273792 REP has these limitations e You must configure each segment port an incorrect configuration can cause forwarding loops in the networks e REP can manage only a single failed port within the segment multiple port failures within the REP segment cause loss of network connectivity Configure REP in networks only with redundancy Configuring REP in a network without redundancy causes loss of connectivity Link Integrity REP does not use an end to end polling mechanism between edge ports to verify link integrity It implements local link failure detection The REP Link Status Layer LSL detects its REP aware neighbor and establishes connectivity within the segment All VLANs are blocked on an interface until it detects the neighbor After the neighbor is identified REP determines the neighbor port to become the alternate port and which ports forward traffic Each port in a segment has a unique port ID The port ID format is similar to that used by the spanning tree algorithm a port number unique on the bridge associated to a MAC address unique in the network When a segment port is coming up its LSL starts sending packets that include the segment ID and the port ID The port is declared as operational aft
231. ly levels If the system is configured to operate in a dual power mode an alarm is triggered if a power supply fails or is missing The alarm is automatically cleared when the power supplies are present or working You can configure the power supply alarm to be connected to the hardware relays Temperature Primary These alarms are triggered when the system temperature is higher or lower than the configured thresholds By default the primary temperature alarm is associated with the major relay e Temperature Secondary These alarms are triggered when the system temperature is higher or lower than the configured thresholds e License File Corrupt An alarm is triggered when the license file is corrupt Input Alarm 1 An alarm is triggered based on an external input alarm Input Alarm 2 An alarm is triggered based on an external input alarm Alarm information appears on the dashboard of the Device Manager Web interface Alarm traps will be sent to an SNMP server if SNMP is enabled on the Configure gt Security gt SNMP window The switch s alarm relay is triggered sending a fault signal to a connected external alarm device such as a bell light or other signaling device that you have configured Alarm traps are recorded in the syslog You can view the syslog on the Monitor gt Syslog window The maximum temperature threshold for the corresponding Temperature Primary or Temperature Secondary alarm if enabled The minimum te
232. m wattage of the powered device is greater than the configured maximum value the switch does not provide power to the port If the switch powers a powered Cisco end device but the powered device later requests through CDP messages more than the configured maximum value the switch removes power to the port The power that was allocated to the powered device is reclaimed into the global power budget If you do not specify a wattage the switch delivers the maximum value Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 87 Chapter 3 88 Switch Software Features e Static Ihe switch pre allocates power to the port even when no powered device is connected and guarantees that power is available for the port The switch allocates the port configured maximum wattage and the amount is never adjusted through the IEEE class or by CDP messages from a powered Cisco end device Because power is pre allocated any powered device that uses less than or equal to the maximum wattage is guaranteed to be powered when it is connected to the static port The port no longer participates in the first come first served model However if the powered device IEEE class is greater than the maximum wattage the switch does not supply power to it If the switch learns through CDP messages that a powered Cisco end device needs more than the maximum wattage the powered device is shut down If you do not specify a wattage the switch pre allocates the m
233. management VLAN The password used for Telnet and CIP security Sets the password used for Telnet and CIP security to the same user password specified under Network Settings Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 10 Click Submit The switch initializes its configuration for typical industrial EtherNet IP applications The switch then redirects you to the logon page for the Device Manager Web interface You can continue to launch the Device Manager Web interface for further configuration or exit the application 11 Turn off DC power at the source disconnect all cables to the switch and install the switch in your network IMPORTANT For 1783 BMS4S2SGL or 1783 BMS4S2SGA switches make sure DC power is disconnected prior to disconnecting Ethernet cables 12 After you complete Express Setup refresh the computer IP address e For a dynamically assigned IP address disconnect the computer from the switch and reconnect the computer to the network The network DHCP server assigns a new IP address to the computer e For a statically assigned IP address change it to the previously configured IP address Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 73 Chapter2 Switch Installation Notes 74 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Software Features Topic Port Numbering Global Macro Smartports Power over Ethernet PoE
234. mation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 61 Chapter2 Switch Installation Ground the Switch conductor or operate the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed ground conductor Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available ATTENTION This equipment must be grounded Never defeat the ground This equipment is intended to be grounded to comply with emission and immunity requirements Make sure that the switch functional ground lug is connected to earth ground during normal use ground follow the grounding procedure instructions and use a suitable ring ATTENTION To make sure that the equipment is reliably connected to earth terminal lug such as Thomas amp Bett part number 10RCR or equivalent Use at least 4 mm 12 AWG wire to connect to the external grounding screw The ground lug is not supplied with the switch You can use one of the these options e Single ring terminal e Two single ring terminals To ground the switch to earth ground follow these steps Be sure to follow any grounding requirements at your site 1 Use a Phillips screwdriver or a ratcheting torque screwdriver with a Phillips head to remove the ground screw from the front panel of the switch Store the ground screw for later use 2 Use the manufacturer s guidelines to determine the wire length to be stripped 3 Insert the ground wire into t
235. mma and a carriage return Optional Enter a geographic location of the switch up to 200 characters The geographic location can include alphanumeric and special characters dash and comma and a carriage return Choose one of the following e RSTP MST e PVST lt RPVST RSTP MST is the default Check the checkbox to enable the feature The feature is disabled by default Click to refresh the tab with new data from the switch Click to save the settings to the switch and the SD card if installed Once the password has been entered correctly changes can be made within 10 minutes without the Enter Password dialog box prompting you for a password Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 Switch Status From the Switch Status tab you can view various status parameters for the switch General Connection Module Info Fault Pragram Action Switch Configuration Switch Status Port Configuration Smartports amp VLANs Port Thresholds Port Security PLL Alarms amp Faults Health TA e Hane Switch Uptime 1 week 2 days 3 hours 22 Major Alarm Relay Open Switch Temperature 48 C Active Faults Mone Bandwidth Utilization i Traffic Threshold Exceeded on Any Port Ma Image Number of Active Multicast Groups IOS Release SS700 UNIVERSAL M Version 15 0 1 E Y Power Power Present on Terminal es license Eije Ok Power Present on T
236. mperature threshold for the corresponding Temperature Primary or Temperature Secondary alarm if enabled Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 167 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Port Alarms To create alarm profiles for individual ports from the Configure menu choose Alarm Settings and click the Port tab o Alarms Alarm Settings Alarm Relay Setup Global ML Port Name Alarm Profile FCS Threshold amp 11 Fal 1 defaultPort g Fal 2 defaultPort g Fal 3 defaultPort 8 Fal 4 defaultPort g Fal 5 defaultPort 8 Fal 6 defaultPort 8 Fal defaultPort B For each port choose an Alarm Profile and set the FCS threshold The frame check sequence FCS error hysteresis threshold is expressed as a percentage of fluctuation from the FCS bit error rate The default setting is 8 percent You can adjust the percentage to prevent toggling the alarm condition when the FCS bit error rate fluctuates near the configured bit error rate Valid percentages for port settings are 6 11 Configure Alarm Profiles You can use alarm profiles to apply a group of alarm settings to multiple interfaces These alarm profiles are created for you e defaultPort e ab alarm created during Express Setup To create modify or delete alarm profiles from the Configure menu choose Alarm Profiles o Alarms Alarm Profiles Profiles Add t W Delete C Profile Name C defaultPort
237. mputer or within the Logix Designer application project You must be online to save and restore configuration files Most of the settings appear dimmed when the switch is offline Be prepared to enter a valid switch password to save and restore a switch configuration Smartports amp VLANs Port Thresholds Port Security Port Status DHCP Pool Display DHCP Address Assignment 5D Flash Sync 2ave Restore i Exchange Configuration with Switch Upload amp Upload Full configuration contig text and vlan dat from switch to project Download full configuration canfig test and vlan dat from Download project to switch Import Export Configuration Import full configuration config text and vlan dat from Import RS a files into project Export full configuration canfig text and vlan dat from Export SE EE ae project into files The switch configuration consists of these two files e Text file containing configuration parameters e Binary file containing VLAN information Once the switch configuration is uploaded to the project file in the Logix Designer application the switch configuration can be exported as computer files by using the Export button You can import a switch configuration from the appropriate files on your computer to the project by using the Import button on the switch AOP You can then download the configuration to the switch by using the Download
238. n PortFa1_22Utilization PortFa1_23Utilization PortFa1_24Utilization MajorAlarmRelay MulticastGroupsActive Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 269 AppendixA Module defined Data Types Module defined Output Data Type 24 port switches 270 AB STRATIX_5700_24PORT_MANAGED 0 0 Default Display Style Valid Values Member Name AllPortsDisabled PortFa1_ Disable PortFa1_2Disable PortFa1_3Disable PortFa1_4Disable PortFa1_5Disable PortFa1_6Disable PortFa1_7Disable PortFa1_8Disable PortFa1_9Disable PortFa1_ 10Disable PortFa1_ 11Disable PortFa1_ 12Disable PortFa1_ 13Disable PortFa1_ 14Disable PortFa1_ 15Disable PortFa1_ 16Disable PortFa1_ 17Disable PortFa1_ 18Disable PortFa1_ 19Disable PortFa1_20Disable PortFa1_21Disable PortFa1_22Disable PortFa1_23Disable PortFa1_24Disable Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 DisablePort 0 DisablePort 1 DisablePort 2 DisablePort 3 DisablePort 4 DisablePort 5 DisablePort 6 DisablePort 7 DisablePort 8 DisablePort 9 DisablePort 10 DisablePort 11 DisablePort 12 DisablePort 13 DisablePort 14 DisablePort 15 DisablePort 16 DisablePort 17 DisablePort 18 DisablePort 19 DisablePort 20 DisablePort 21 DisablePort 22 DisablePort 23 DisablePort 24 Instance Bit Bit 0 Instance Bit 1 Instance Bit 2 Instance Bit 3 Instance Bit 4 Instance Bit 5 Instance Bit 6 Instance Bit 7 Instance Bit 8 Instance Bit 9 Instance Bit 10
239. n influence your STP topology you might find it useful to enable BPDU Filtering and BPDU Guard on your access ports These features prevent a rogue device from interfering with your STP topology However we recommend you use these features with caution e BPDU Filtering This PortFast feature blocks all sending and receiving of BPDUs through all PortFast enabled ports This feature effectively disables STP on these ports and loops can result Ifa BPDU is received PortFast is disabled on the port and the global STP settings apply To enable BPDU Filtering on all PortFast enabled ports check Enable e BPDU Guard This PortFast feature shuts down a port if it receives a BPDU To enable BPDU Guard on all Port Fast enabled ports check Enable Note that if you enable both of these features BPDU Guard has no effect because BPDU Filtering prevents the port from receiving any BPDUs 150 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Configure REP lt Spanning Tree REP REP Admin Vian Submit Port Name Fal 1 Fal 2 Fa1 3 Fal 4 Fal 5 Fal 6 Mode Trunk Access Dynamic auto Dynamic auto Dynamic auto Dynamic auto Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Per Interface PortFast Table Spanning tree reguires an interface to progress through the listening and learning states to exchange information and establish a loop free path before it can forward frames On ports that
240. n 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 NAT Configuration You can create NAT instances from the NAT tab Port Security Port Status DHCP Pool Display DHCP Address Assignment Time Sync Configuration Time Sync Information NAT SD Flash Sync save Restore dajak Network Address Translation NAT Instance s Gi1 1 WLANs Gil 2 VLAN s Delete Diagnostics instances _ _ m LL instance2 J w New Instance Global Diagnostics Current Active Translations Total Translations Total Translated Packets Total Untranslated Packets So tw O ji Refresh Communication Set Table 43 NAT Tab Fields Field Name Gi1 1 VLANs Gi1 2 VLANs Delete Edit Diagnostics New Instance Current Active Translations Total Translations Total Translated Packets Total Untranslated Packets Refresh Communication Set Description Displays the unique name of the NAT instance Displays the VLANs assigned to each NAT instance on port Gi1 1 Displays the VLANs assigned to each NAT instance on port Gi1 2 Click to permanently delete a NAT instance The switch deletes the instance when you click Set Click to modify the configuration of a NAT instance Click to view translation diagnostics for an instance See page 229 Click to create a NAT instance See page 216 Display
241. n about CIP status Overview field and statistics Request Details field since the switch was last powered on was restarted or the counters were last reset To troubleshoot an issue reset the CIP counters and see if the counters show that the issue still exists IMPORTANT Except for Active Multicast Groups all other categories are related to the CIP server in the switch that is pertaining to CIP traffic specifically directed to the switch as a CIP target device They do not refer to CIP EtherNet IP traffic flowing through the switch among various CIP controllers HMI devices configuration tools or other CIP target devices such as drives 1 0 modules motor starters sensors and valves To monitor CIP status from the Monitor menu choose CIP Status GO status CIP Overview State Disabled Vian CIP I O Connection Owner None CIP Config Session Owner 0 0 0 0 Management CPU Utilization 4 Active Explicit Msg Connections 0 Active I Connections 0 Active Multicast Groups 0 Connection Details Open Requests 0 Clase Requests 0 Open Format Rejects 0 Clase Format Rejects 0 Open Resource Rejects 0 Clase Other Rejects 0 Open Other Rejects 0 Connection Timeouts 0 Reset Counters 174 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Table 21 CIP Status Fields Field State Vlan CIP 1 0 Connection Owner CIP Config Session Owner Management CPU Utilization Active Explicit Msg Co
242. n or equal to 24 VDC 1 0 A or 48 VDC ATTENTION The input voltage source of the alarm output relay circuit must be 0 5 A Connect to 10 100 and 10 100 1000 Ports The switch 10 100 and 10 100 1000 ports automatically configure themselves to operate at the speed of attached devices If the attached ports do not support autonegotiation you can explicitly set the speed and duplex parameters Connecting devices that do not autonegotiate or that have their speed and duplex parameters manually set can reduce performance or result in no linkage The Auto MDIX feature is enabled by default Unless this feature is disabled you can use either straight through or crossover cables to connect to other devices on the network To maximize performance choose one of these methods for configuring the Ethernet ports e Let the ports autonegotiate both speed and duplex e Set the port speed and duplex parameters on both ends of the connection Connect to PoE Ports For power supply requirements based on your application refer to page G4 1 Insert a straight through twisted four pair Category Se or better cable with an M12 connector into the PoE port 2 Insert the other cable end into an M12 connector on the other PoE powered device 66 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Set Up the Switch Initially with Express Setup Switch Installation
243. nactive No Fault Mo No Mo Fa1 2 No alarme Active No Fault Mo No Mo Fal 3 Mo alarms lnactive No Fault No No Ho Fa1 4 Mo alarma Inactive No Fault Mo No Mo 0 Fa1 5 Mo alarme Inactive No Fault Mo No Mo Fai 6 No alarms lnactive No Fault No No No Fa1 7 No alarmes Inactive No Fault Mo No Mo Fa1 8 Mo alarms Inactive No Fault Mo No Mo Table 37 Port Status Tab Fields Field Port Port Alarm Status Link Status Port Fault Status Threshold Exceeded Bandwidth Utilization Percent Port Diagnostics Cable Diagnostics Description Displays the selected port The port number includes the port type Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet and the specific port number EXAMPLE Gi1 1 is Gigabit Ethernet port 1 Displays the current status of the port alarm Valid values e Link fault alarm e Port not forwarding alarm e Port not operating alarm e High bit error rate alarm No alarms Displays whether the link is active or inactive Displays the current status of the port alarm Valid values e Error Disable event e SFP error Disabled e DP native VLAN mismatch e MAC address flap e Port security violation e No fault Displays unusual changes for these types of network traffic e Unicast Displays a yes or no value indicating whether the current unicast traffic has exceeded the threshold value e Multicast Displays a yes or no value indicating whethe
244. nal Computer 3TD _ gt 3RD 6lD Mm 6RD 1RD lt 1TD 2 RD lt 2 TD Figure 14 Four Twisted pair Straight through Cable Schematic Switch Router or Personal Computer TPO lt gt TPO lt gt TP1 lt V7 gt TP1 lt gt TP1 TPT TPO TPO OWN OWN TP2 lt gt TP2 gt TP3 lt gt TP3 lt gt TP3 TP3 TP27 TP2 CON MN A CON UO A When connecting the ports to LOBASE T and 100BASE TX compatible devices such as switches or repeaters you can use a two or four twisted pair crossover cable The following figures show these schematics e wo twisted pair crossover cable schematics e Four twisted pair crossover cable schematics Use a straight through cable to connect two ports when only one port is designated with an X Use a crossover cable to connect two ports when both ports are designated with an X or when both ports do not have an X You can use Category 3 4 or 5 cabling when connecting to LOBASE T compatible devices You must use Category 5 cabling when connecting to 100BASE TX compatible devices IMPORTANT Usea four twisted pair Category 5 cable when connecting to a 1000BASE T compatible device or PoE port Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 275 AppendixC Cables and Connectors Figure 15 Two Twisted pair Crossover Cable Schematic Switch Switch 3 TD 3 TD 6 TD 6 TD 1 RD 1 R
245. ncel 5 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 163 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Configure IGMP Snooping 164 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP snooping reduces duplicate and excess traffic on the network by forwarding IP multicast traffic to specific switch ports rather than by flooding all ports With IGMP snooping ports that are members of only specific IP multicast groups receive multicast messages The result is a more efficient use of bandwidth To configure IGMP snooping from the Configure menu choose IGMP Snooping e Toenable IGMP Snooping for all VLAN IDs check Enable next to IGMP Snooping e Toenable IGMP Querier for all VLAN IDs check Enable next to IGMP Querier e Io enable or disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN select the VLAN and check or clear the Enable IGMP Snooping checkbox o Security IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Enable IGMP Querier Enable Submit IGMP Snooping Table VLAN ID VLAN Name Enable IGMP Snooping 1 default 500 management Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Configure SNMP security SNMP Enable SNMP Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Enable SNMP if you plan to have the switch managed through another network management application By default SNMP is disabled Other general SNMP settings include the name of t
246. nfigure an EtherChannel in one of these modes e Port Aggregation Protocol PAgP e Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP e On Configure both ends of the EtherChannel in the same mode e When you configure one end of an EtherChannel in either PAgP or LACP mode the system negotiates with the other end of the channel to determine the ports to become active Incompatible ports are suspended Instead of a suspended state the local port is put into an independent state and continues to carry data traffic as any other single link The port configuration does not change but the port does not participate in the EtherChannel e When you configure an EtherChannel in the On mode no negotiations take place The switch forces all compatible ports to become active in the EtherChannel The other end of the channel on the other switch must also be configured in the On mode otherwise packet loss can occur If a link within an EtherChannel fails traffic previously carried over that failed link moves to the remaining links within the EtherChannel If traps are enabled on the switch a trap is sent for a failure that identifies the switch the EtherChannel and the failed link Inbound broadcast and multicast packets on one link in an EtherChannel are blocked from returning on any other link of the EtherChannel Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 99 Chapter3 Switch Software Features DHCP Persistence CIP Sync Time
247. ng the clocks in the system All clocks ultimately derive their time from a clock selected as the Grandmaster clock By default PTP is disabled on all the Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet ports on the switch The switch supports these Synchronization Clock modes e End to End Transparent mode The switch transparently synchronizes all slave clocks with the master clock connected to the switch The switch corrects the delay incurred by every packet passing through the switch referred to as residence time This mode causes less jitter and error accumulation than Boundary mode In End to End Transparent mode all switch ports are enabled by default e Boundary mode The switch becomes the parent clock to which the other devices connected to the switch synchronize their internal clocks The switch and connected devices constantly exchange timing messages to correct time skew caused by clock offsets and network delays This mode can eliminate the effects of latency fluctuations Because jitter and errors can accumulate in cascaded topologies use this mode for networks with only less than four layers of cascaded devices In Boundary mode one or more switch ports can be PTP enabled e Forward mode default Traffic is forwarded through the switch while being prioritized by QoS but is not acted on by the switch IMPORTANT When changing the PTP timing message settings remember that the system does not operate properly unless a
248. nnected PortFa1_ 3Connected PortFa1_ 4Connected PortFa1_5Connected PortFa1_ 6Connected AnyPortUnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 2UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 3UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_4UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 5UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 6UnauthorizedDevice AnyPortThreshold PortFa1_ 1Threshold PortFa1_ 2Threshold PortFa1_3Threshold PortFa1_ 4Threshold PortFa1_5Threshold PortFa1_ 6Threshold AllPortsUtilization PortFa1_ 1Utilization PortFa1_ 2Utilization PortFa1_ 3Utilization PortFa1_ 4Utilization Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 LinkStatus 0 LinkStatus 1 LinkStatus 2 LinkStatus 3 LinkStatus 4 LinkStatus 5 LinkStatus 6 UnauthorizedDevice 0 UnauthorizedDevice 1 UnauthorizedDevice 2 UnauthorizedDevice 3 UnauthorizedDevice 4 UnauthorizedDevice 5 UnauthorizedDevice 6 ThresholdExceeded 0 ThresholdExceeded 1 ThresholdExceeded 2 ThresholdExceeded 3 ThresholdExceeded 4 ThresholdExceeded 5 ThresholdExceeded 6 Module defined Output Data Type 6 port switches Module defined Input Data Type 8 port switches Module defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_6PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Default Display Valid Values Style PortFa1_ 5Utilization PortFa1_ 6Utilization MajorAlarmRelay MulticastGroupsActive AB STRATIX_5700_6PORT_MANAGED 0 0 AlarmRelay 0 Member Name Default Display Style Valid Values AllPortsDisabled PortFa1_ 1Disable PortFa1_ 2Disable PortFa1_3
249. nnected LinkStatus 4 PortFa1_5Connected LinkStatus 5 PortFa1_ 6Connected LinkStatus 6 PortFa1_ 7Connected LinkStatus 7 PortFa1_ 8Connected LinkStatus 8 PortFa1_ 9Connected LinkStatus 9 PortFa1_ 10Connected LinkStatus 10 PortFa1_11Connected LinkStatus 11 PortFa1_ 12Connected LinkStatus 12 PortFa1_ 13Connected LinkStatus 13 PortFa1_ 14Connected LinkStatus 14 PortFa1_15Connected LinkStatus 15 PortFa1_16Connected LinkStatus 16 PortFa1_ 17Connected LinkStatus 17 PortFa1_ 18Connected LinkStatus 18 PortFa1_19Connected LinkStatus 19 PortFa1_20Connected LinkStatus 20 AnyPortUnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 0 PortFa1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 1 PortFa1_2UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 2 PortFa1_ 3UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 3 PortFa1_4UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 4 PortFa1_ 5UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 5 PortFa1_ 6UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 6 PortFa1_7UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 7 PortFa1_ 8UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 8 PortFa1_ 9UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 9 PortFa1_ 10UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 10 PortFa1_ 11UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 11 PortFa1_ 12UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 12 PortFa1_ 13UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 13 PortFa1_ 14UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 14 PortFa1_ 15UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 15 PortFa1_ 16UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 16 264 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783
250. nnected devices have on the switch performance or the network For example if you suspect that a connected device is sending error packets you can verify if the data on the graph changes when you disconnect and reconnect the suspected device The Port Utilization Errors graph show the usage patterns of a specific port over incremental instances in time by 60 seconds 60 minutes 24 hours or 14 days The default is 60 seconds To display the trends for a specific port choose a port from the Port list Use these graphs to observe the performance of a specific port For example if a network user is having intermittent network connectivity use the Port Utilization graph to observe the traffic patterns on the port to which the user s personal computer is connected and use the Port Errors graph to see if the port is receiving or sending error packets For PoE switches the PoE Utilization graph shows the power that is allocated to the connected devices Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Monitor Port Statistics Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 You can view statistics for data sent and received by the switch ports since the switch was last powered on was restarted or since the statistics were last cleared To monitor port statistics from the Monitor menu choose Port Statistics See the Device Manager Web interface online help for additional information Statistics
251. nnections Active 1 0 Connections Active Multicast Groups Open Requests Close Requests Open Format Rejects Close Format Rejects Open Resource Rejects Close Other Rejects Open Other Rejects Connection Timeouts Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Description Overview The state of the CIP connection Enabled or Disabled The VLAN ID The IP address of the device to and from which application specific 1 0 output data is sent and received The IP address of the device controlling the CIP configuration session Percentage of the Management CPU used for management functions Switch functions have dedicated ASICs that are not impacted by management functions The number of active explicit messaging connections to the switch as a target The number of active 1 0 connections with the switch as a target The number of multicast groups including CIP multicast groups flowing through the switch Connection Details The number of Forward Open requests received by the switch to establish a connection with the switch The number of Forward Close requests received by the switch after a connection was successfully established with the switch The number of Forward Open requests directed to the switch that failed because the request is not in the proper format The number of Forward Close requests directed to the switch that failed because the request is not in the proper format The number of Forward Open requests that f
252. nstall the card slide it into the slot and press on it until it clicks in place The card is keyed so that you cannot insert it the wrong way e To remove the card push it in until it releases for it to pop out Place it in an antistatic bag to protect it from static discharge 3 Close the guard door and fasten the captive screws to 1 8 2 2Nem 15 93 19 47 lb ein to maintain IP67 compliance Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 59 Chapter 2 60 Switch Installation Verify Switch Operation Before installing the switch in its final location power on the switch and verify that the switch powers up The time reguired for the switch to start up is directly related to your switch configuration Start time is negatively affected by such things as the following e Spanning Tree Learning mode e Number of files or images in onboard flash memory To test the switch follow these steps 1 Power on the switch To apply power to a switch that is directly connected to a DC power source locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit and switch the circuit breaker to the ON position 2 Verify the start up sequence When you power on the switch it automatically begins a start up fast routine The System status indicator blinks green as the IOS software image loads If the routine fails the System status indicator turns red IMPORTANT Start up failures are usually fatal
253. nstances for Traffic Routed through a Layer 3 Switch or Router 0 eee eee ee eee Create NAT Instances for Traffic Routed through a Laver 2 SWitth avis 2254006900 66 N O d 94 Ee Configure Traffic Permits and Fixups Contfig re POL SEecttit enan gwd y mies boron O Fn Confioure IGMP Snoopun gaa Y dd FA DEG Configure SNMP a Go DG BD GO DDI DUO GEN Use SNMP Management Applications Configure Alarm SETIN eieaa RA A YN GG AE Relay SCDE e GC Y UF RYD Global Alaris 32 04 GG DE 246656 io tude O EG aes Rore ANS eaten areata O O Oe O I RR Noe led Configure Alarm Pronlestu a UaU a Gn Gh A Monitor rend e5 ge Ed ob DRDD ORG Monitor Port StatistiCS ieres acere Go DA A een ite GG OY GU Monitor NA T Statistics22 44 ag GG EAA ERA Monitor REP EopolOo ceu eiu MU CO NG Odo od GU OU EN Monitor CIP Stiw i r 43022A do 040102 Diagnose Cabling Broblem dau GY Cd View System Lop Messages i du GWR Od Dn GER Use Express Setup to Change Switch Settings Manmade lI SEIS cu ee aY y A ADU AF FANON ENG Reallocate Switch Memory for Routing Restart the Switch YL FFY Y eee Y Y Y Fee Upgrade the Switch Firmwares cn seh yw dy hve Fn FOD O Use the SD Card to Synchronize the Configuration or IOS Files Upload and Download Configuration Files Upsrade License Pies 22esi9 3222002059542499 60 R GG cect Chapter 5 EtherNet IP CIP Int
254. nticating and encrypting packets over the network The security model used by SNMPv3 is an authentication strategy that is set up for a user and the user s group A security level is the permitted level of security within a security model A combination of a security model and a security level determines which security mechanism is used for an SNMP packet These are some guidelines about SNMPv3 objects IMPORTANT SNMPv 3 is available only in the cryptographic version of the switch firmware e Fach user belongs to a group e A group defines the access policy for a set of users e Anaccess policy defines which SNMP objects can be accessed for reading writing and creating e A group determines the list of notifications that its users can receive e A group also defines the security model and the security level for its users e An SNMP view is a list of MIBs that a group can access e Data can be securely collected from SNMP devices without fear of the data being tampered with or corrupted e Confidential information for example SNMP Set command packets that change a router configuration can be encrypted to prevent the contents from being exposed on the network Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 111 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Table 8 Supported MIBs MIB Name BRIDGE MIB CALISTA DPA MIB CISCO ACCESS ENVMON MIB CISCO ADMISSION POLICY MIB CISCO AUTH FRAMEWORK MIB CISCO BRIDGE EXT MIB CISCO B
255. ntify connectivity issues including speed mismatch and the location of cable breaks and faults Falj4 176 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 The system log displays events that occurred on the device and its ports based on the Alarm Settings you configure on the Configure gt Alarm Settings window View System Log Messages To view system log messages from the Monitor menu choose Syslog Q Troubleshoot Syslog Severity Filter show all logs above and including this severity debugging _ w Type Filter _ NONE ina Clear Log Time Stamp Severity Description Mar 1 00 00 18 debugging Read env variable LICENSE BOOT_LEVEL Mar 30 01 27 41 informational I05S LICENSE IMAGE APPLICATION 6 LICENSE LEVEL Module name ie2k Next reboot level lanlite and Lice Mar 30 01 27 49 notifications LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Vlani changed state to down Mar 30 01 27 50 notifications SoSPANTREE 5 EXTENDED SYSID Extended SysId enabled for type vlan Mar 30 01 27 55 notifications SoLINEPROTO S UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Vlan500 changed state to down Mar 30 01 27 56 notifications 3 5Y5 5 CONFIG_ I Configured from memory by console Mar 30 01 27 57 notifications SoLINK 5 CHANGED Interface Vlani changed state to administratively down Mar 30 01 27 58 notifications oSYS 5 RESTART Sys
256. ntrol network rings and loops handle link failures and improve convergence time REP controls a group of ports connected in a segment makes sure that the segment does not create any bridging loops and responds to link failures within the segment REP provides a basis for constructing more complex networks and supports VLAN load balancing REP is a segment protocol One REP segment is a chain of ports connected to each other and configured with a segment ID Each segment consists of standard transit segment ports and two user configured edge ports A switch can have no more than two ports that belong to the same segment and each segment port can have only one external neighbor A segment can go through a shared medium however on any link only two ports can belong to the same segment REP is supported only on Layer 2 trunk interfaces Selecting the Switch for Automation Smartport enables Layer 2 trunking REP is supported on EtherChannels but not on an individual port that belongs to an EtherChannel You can construct almost any type of network based on REP segments REP also supports VLAN load balancing controlled by the primary edge port but occurring at any port in the segment These types of REP ports are selectable in the Device Manager Web interface e Primary This port is a primary edge port This port always participates in VLAN load balancing in the REP segment e Edge This port is a secondary edge port It also participate
257. ock quality or clock class for the best master clock selection The switch used as a tie breaker between two devices that are otherwise equally matched in the default criteria For example you can give a specific switch priority over other identical switches The range is from 0 255 A lower values take precedence The default is 128 The clock source The accuracy in nanoseconds from the Grandmaster clock The number of the switch port including port type such as Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet the base switch number 1 and the specific port number For example Fa1 1 is Fast Ethernet port 1 on the base switch Boundary mode only The synchronization state on the switch port with the parent or Grandmaster clock e Listening The switch port is waiting while a parent or Grandmaster clock is selected e Pre master The switch port is transitioning to change to Master state e Master The switch is acting as a parent clock to the devices connected to that switch port e Passive tThe switch has detected a redundant path to a parent or Grandmaster clock For example two different switch ports claim the same parent or Grandmaster clock To prevent a loop in the network one of the ports changes to Passive state Uncalibrated The switch port cannot synchronize with the parent or Grandmaster clock Slave the switch port is connected to and synchronizing with the parent or Grandmaster clock Faulty PTP is not operat
258. odule defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_24PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Default Display Style Valid Values AnyPortConnected PortFa1_ 1Connected PortFa1_ 2Connected PortFa1_3Connected PortFa1_ 4Connected PortFa1_5Connected PortFa1_6Connected PortFa1_ 7Connected PortFa1_ 8Connected PortFa1_ 9Connected PortFa1_ 10Connected PortFa1_11Connected PortFa1_ 12Connected PortFa1_13Connected PortFa1_ 14Connected PortFa1_15Connected PortFa1_16Connected PortFa1_17Connected PortFa1_ 18Connected PortFa1_ 19Connected PortFa1_20Connected PortFa1_21Connected PortFa1_22Connected PortFa1_23Connected PortFa1_ 24Connected AnyPortUnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 0 PortFa1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 1 PortFa1_2UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 2 PortFa1_ 3UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 3 LinkStatus 0 LinkStatus 1 LinkStatus 2 LinkStatus 3 LinkStatus 4 LinkStatus 5 LinkStatus 6 LinkStatus 7 LinkStatus 8 LinkStatus 9 LinkStatus 10 LinkStatus 11 LinkStatus 12 LinkStatus 13 LinkStatus 14 LinkStatus 15 LinkStatus 16 LinkStatus 17 LinkStatus 18 LinkStatus 19 LinkStatus 20 LinkStatus 21 LinkStatus 22 LinkStatus 23 LinkStatus 24 Appendix A PortFa1_ 4UnauthorizedDevice BOOL UnauthorizedDevice 4 PortFa1_ 5UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 5 PortFa1_ 6UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 6 PortFa1_ 7UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 7 PortFa1_ 8UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 8 PortFa1_ 9
259. of the management VLAN through which the switch is managed Choose an existing VLAN to be the management VLAN The default ID is 1 The default name for the management VLAN is default The number can be from 1 1001 Be sure that the switch and your network management station are in the same VLAN Otherwise you lose management connectivity to the switch The management VLAN is the broadcast domain through which management traffic is sent between specific users or devices It provides broadcast control and security for management traffic that must be limited to a specific group of users such as the administrators of your network It also provides secure administrative access to all devices in the network at all times IP Assignment Mode The IP Assignment mode determines whether the switch IP information is manually assigned static or is automatically assigned by a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server The default is Static We recommend that you click Static and manually assign the IP address for the switch You can then use the same IP address whenever you want to access the Device Manager Web interface If you click DHCP the DHCP server automatically assigns an IP address subnet mask and default gateway to the switch As long as the switch is not restarted the switch continues to use the assigned IP information and you are able to use the same IP address to access the Device Manager Web interface If you manually assign the switch IP
260. on about the I O connections the device supports and the content of the associated data structures If you are using the switch in a system that does not have a Rockwell Automation Logix based controller to monitor or control your switch you cannot use the AOP supplied with Logix controllers You must use information from the EDS files to sec up the I O connection The OPC Server contained in RSLinx Classic software also uses EDS files to provide you with a list of parameters when adding items OPC Tags to a Topic the switch EDS files for the Stratix 5700 switches are included with the following software packages e RSLinx software version 2 54 or later e RSLogix 5000 software version 16 or later or the Logix Designer application version 21 00 00 or later e RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP software version 9 0 or later You can also obtain the EDS files in either of these two ways e From http www rockwellautomation com resources eds TIP To locate a specific EDS file do the following e Choose EtherNet IP from the Network type field e Enter Stratix 5700 in the Keyword field e Leave the other fields with their default entries e From the switch by using the RSLinx EDS Hardware Installation Tool Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 189 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment To upload the EDS files directly from the switch over the network follow these steps 1 From the S
261. on the Module Definition dialog box Module Definition a n Revision 1 yi 1 E Electronic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Data Connection Password geeecee DANGER Connection Interruption Data Connection Output Tag can disable ports resulting in interruption of connections to and through the switch Description The major and minor revision of the switch e Major revision a number from 1 128 e Minor revision a number from 1 255 e Compatible Module default e Exact Match e Disable Keying e Input Data default Enables only the input data connection e Data Enables input and output data connection ATTENTION This selection enables output tags which can disable ports and interrupt connections to and through the switch You can disable a switch port by setting the corresponding bit in the output tag The output bits are applied every time the switch receives the output data from the controller when the controller is in Run mode When the controller is in Program mode the output bits are not applied The port is enabled if the corresponding output bit is 0 If you enable or disable a port by using the Device Manager Web interface or the CLI the port setting can be overridden by the output bits from the controller on the next cyclic update of the 1 0 connection The output bits always take precedence regardless of whether the Device Manager Web interface or CLI was used to enable
262. onnected routing Enables all devices on any VLAN that use the switch to communicate with each other if they use the switch as their default gateway Connected routing is automatically enabled if you enable static routing Io disable connected routing and prevent inter VLAN communication you must configure access control lists ACLs by using the CLI Enabling routing is a two step process within the Device Manager Web interface 1 Reallocate switch memory for routing by changing the Switch Database Management SDM template from the default template to the Lanbase Routing template 2 Enable connected routing only or Enable and configure static routing which enables connected routing by default Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 113 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Configuration Management SD Card Synchronization Alarms Cryptographic 10S Software optional 114 The switch can store its configuration in internal memory or on an external SD card By default the SD card always takes precedence over internal memory If you have a valid IOS image and configuration files on the SD card and start the switch with the SD card inserted the switch loads the files from the SD card In general the start method for the switch becomes the source for any changes you make to the configuration For example if you start from the SD card any changes you make are saved to the SD card If you start the s
263. onnection by manually disabling the port Check the checkbox if you want the port and end device to auto negotiate the link speed and Duplex mode Clear the checkbox to manually specify the desired port speed and Duplex mode We recommend that you use the default auto negotiate so that the speed and duplex settings on the switch port automatically match the setting on the connected device Change the switch port speed and duplex if the connected device requires a specific speed and duplex If you set the speed and duplex for the switch port the connected device must also be configured for the exact same speed and duplex and not set to auto negotiate otherwise a speed duplex mismatch occurs Fiber optic interfaces do not support auto negotiation Choose the operating speed of the port Gigabit Gi e 10 Mbps e 100 Mbps e 1Gbps Fast Ethernet Fa e 10 Mbps e 100 Mbps Choose one of these Duplex modes e Half duplex Both devices cannot send data at the same time Half duplex is not available when speed is set to 1 Gbps e Full duplex Both devices can send data at the same time Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 Power over Ethernet PoE PoE and PoE features are supported on switches with PoE ports when a correct power supply is connected to the switch For power supply requirements see page 44 You can do the following from the Po
264. onsisting of six ports spread across four switches Ports E1 and E2 are configured as edge ports When all ports are operational as in the segment on the left a single port is blocked shown by the diagonal line When there is a failure in the network as shown in the diagram on the right the blocked port returns to the forwarding state to minimize network disruption REP Open Segment The segment shown in Figure 6 is an open segment There is no connectivity between the two edge ports The REP segment cannot cause a bridging loop and it is safe to connect the segment edges to any network All hosts connected to switches inside the segment have two possible connections to the rest of the network through the edge ports but only one connection is accessible at any time If a failure causes a host to be unable to access its usual gateway REP unblocks all ports to make sure that connectivity is available through the other gateway In the following example E1 or E2 can be configured as the primary edge port AEN Edge Port S Blocked Port 3 Link Failure Figure 6 Open Segment Example 201888 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Software Features Chapter 3 REP Ring Segment The segment shown in Figure 7 with both edge ports on the same switch is a ring segment In this configuration there is connectivity between the edge ports through the segment With this configuration you can create a
265. or disable the port Enter the password for accessing the switch Required only for Data connection Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 Connection Properties You can define connection properties for the switch on the Connection tab General Connection Module Info Fault Program Action Switch Configuration Switch Status Port Configuration Smartports amp VLANs Port Thresholds Port Security PLE Requested Packet Interval AFI 1000 0 2 me 300 0 5000 0 _ Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Fun Mode Use Unicast Connection over EtherMet lP Module Fault Table 28 Connection Tab Fields Field Description Requested Packet Interval RPI Enter a value between 300 5000 Inhibit Module Check to disable communication between the controller and the switch Clear the checkbox to restore communication Major Fault on Controller If Connection Fails While in Run mode Check to have the controller create a major fault if connection fails in Run mode Use Unicast Connections over EtherNet IP Check to use Unicast connections with the EtherNet IP network Module Fault Displays the fault code returned from the controller related to the switch you are configuring and the text detailing the module fault has occurred Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 195 Chapter5 Manage
266. orizedDevice PortFa1_ 6UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 7UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 8UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 9UnauthorizedDevice Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 LinkStatus 0 LinkStatus 1 LinkStatus 2 LinkStatus 3 LinkStatus 4 LinkStatus 5 LinkStatus 6 LinkStatus 7 LinkStatus 8 LinkStatus 9 LinkStatus 10 LinkStatus 11 LinkStatus 12 LinkStatus 13 LinkStatus 14 LinkStatus 15 LinkStatus 16 LinkStatus 19 LinkStatus 20 UnauthorizedDevice 0 UnauthorizedDevice 1 UnauthorizedDevice 2 UnauthorizedDevice 3 UnauthorizedDevice 4 UnauthorizedDevice 5 UnauthorizedDevice 6 UnauthorizedDevice 7 UnauthorizedDevice 8 UnauthorizedDevice 9 Appendix A 257 Appendix A 258 Module defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_18PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Default Display Valid Values Style PortFa1_ 10UnauthorizedDevice PortFal_11UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 12UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 13UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 14UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 15UnauthorizedDevice PortFa1_ 16UnauthorizedDevice PortGi1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice PortGi1_ 2UnauthorizedDevice AnyPortThreshold PortFa1_ 1Threshold PortFa1_ 2Threshold PortFa1_ 3Threshold PortFa1_ 4Threshold PortFa1_5Threshold PortFa1_ 6Threshold PortFa1_ 7Threshold PortFa1_ 8Threshold PortFa1_ 9Threshold PortFa1_ 10Threshold PortFa1_11Threshold PortFa1_ 12Threshold PortFa1_ 13Threshold PortFa1_ 14Threshold PortFa1_15Threshold PortFa1_16Threshold Por
267. ortGi1_2Utilization MajorAlarmRelay AlarmRelay 0 MulticastGroupsActive AB STRATIX_5700_10PORT_MANAGED 0 0 Member Name Valid Values AllPortsDisabled DisablePort 0 PortFa1_ 1Disable DisablePort 1 PortFa1_ 2Disable DisablePort 2 PortFa1_ 3Disable DisablePort 3 PortFa1_ 4Disable DisablePort 4 PortFa1_ 5Disable DisablePort 5 PortFa1_ 6Disable DisablePort 6 PortFa1_ 7Disable DisablePort 7 PortFa1_ 8Disable DisablePort 8 PortGi1_ 1Disable DisablePort 9 PortGi1_ 2Disable DisablePort 10 AB STRATIX_5700_10PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Type Default Display Style Valid Values Fault DINT AnyPortConnected BOOL PortFa1_1Connected BOOL PortFa1_2Connected BOOL PortFa1_3Connected BOOL PortFa1_4Connected BOOL PortFa1_5Connected BOOL PortFa1_6Connected BOOL PortFa1_7Connected BOOL PortFa1_8Connected BOOL PortFa1_9Connected BOOL PortFa1_ 10Connected BOOL Binary Decimal LinkStatus 0 Decimal LinkStatus 1 Decimal LinkStatus 2 Decimal LinkStatus 3 Decimal LinkStatus 4 Decimal LinkStatus 5 Decimal LinkStatus 6 Decimal LinkStatus 7 Decimal LinkStatus 8 Decimal LinkStatus 9 Decimal LinkStatus 10 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Module defined Data Types Appendix A AB STRATIX_5700_10PORT_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Type Default Display Style Valid Values AnyPortUnauthorizedDevice BOOL Decimal UnauthorizedDevice 0 PortFa1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_ 2UnauthorizedDevice BOOL PortFa1_3UnauthorizedDevice B
268. ortswitches 248 Module defined Input Data Type 10 port Gb switches 249 Module defined Output Data Type 10 port Gb switches 250 Module defined Input Data Type 10 portswitches 250 Module defined Output Data Type 10 port switches 252 Module defined Input Data Type 16 port switches 252 Module defined Output Data Type 16 port switches 254 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 9 Table of Contents Port Assignments for CIP Data Cables and Connectors History of Changes Index Module defined Input Data Type 20 port Gb switches 254 Module defined Input Data Type 18 port Gb switches 257 Module defined Output Data Type 18 port Gb switches 260 Module defined Input Data Type 20 port Gb switches 261 Module defined Output Data Type 20 port Gb switches 263 Module defined Input Data Type 20 port switches 264 Module defined Output Data Type 20 port switches 266 Module defined Input Data Type 24 port switches 267 Module defined Output Data Type 24 port switches 270 Appendix B EEEE E RA NY YR WN E bones AF RHO NY E eee 271 Appendix C 10 100 and 10 100 1000 Ports L Y FFF rutas 27 3 Connect to 1OBASE T and 100BASE TX Compatible Devices 274 Dual purpose Ports combo portS c
269. ositive and return DC power connections 32280 M The positive DC power connection is labeled DC and the negative DC power connection is the adjacent connection labeled DC 3 Measure a length of 0 82 0 52 mm 18 20 AWG copper wire long enough to connect to the DC power source 4 Use an 18 gauge wire stripping tool to strip each of the two wires to 6 3 mm 0 25 in 0 5 mm 0 02 in Do not strip more than 6 8 mm 0 27 in of insulation from the wire Stripping more than the recommended amount of wire can leave wire exposed after installation SO 6 3 mm 0 25 in 0 5 mm 0 02 in 31789 M 5 Loosen the two captive screws that attach the power connector to the switch and remove the power connector Remove both connectors if you are connecting to two power sources L nB sd A by re A PPM Pwe a dey So l la uM 2 IS go Q y 4 N Bb Nz Ap AT A en ry z f AN a ine D ST S p TRITA A W lt INO Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 41 Chapter 2 42 Switch Installation 6 Insert the exposed part of the positive wire into the connection labeled DC and the exposed part of the return wire into the connection labeled DC Be sure that you cannot see any wire lead Only wire with insulation can extend from the connector ATTENTION An exposed wire lead from a DC input power source can conduct harmful levels of electricity
270. ot forwarding condition The output alarm relay can be configured as a normally energized or a normally de energized circuit by using the CLI The Stratix 5700 cryptographic IOS available as a separate catalog number for downloading provides network security by encrypting administrator traffic during Telnet and SNMP sessions The cryptographic IOS supports all features of the standard IOS as well as these protocols e Secure Shell SSH Protocol v2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Cable Diagnostics Advanced Software Features Switch Software Features Chapter 3 e SNMPv3 e HTTPS The Cable Diagnostics feature lets you run a test on each switch port to determine the integrity of the cable connected to the RJ45 copper ports This feature is not available for fiber ports The test determines the distance to the break from the switch for each cable with a plus or minus error value individually listed More advanced software features are available some of which are configured by the global macro or Smartports for typical automation applications described in this manual For information about how to configure features not available in the Device Manager Web interface or the Logix Designer application see the following e Cisco IE2000 Switch Software Configuration Manual available at http www Cisco com e Cisco IE2000 Switch Command Line Interface Manual available at http www Cisco com Rockw
271. ou are connecting the switch to a Cisco network switch the typical default is PVST not RSTP To provide compatibility one or the other switch must be modified Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Port Thresholds Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Port thresholds prevent traffic on a LAN from being disrupted by a broadcast multicast or unicast storm on one of the physical interfaces Port Thresholds do not apply to switches with lite firmware A LAN storm occurs when packets flood the LAN creating excessive traffic and degrading network performance Errors in the protocol stack implementation mistakes in network configurations or users issuing denial of service attacks can cause a storm Incoming storm control Incoming port thresholds or traffic suppression monitors packets passing from an interface to the switching bus and determines if the packet is unicast multicast or broadcast The switch counts the number of packets of a specified type received within the 1 second time interval and compares the measurement with a predefined suppression level threshold Port thresholds uses one of these methods to measure traffic activity e Bandwidth as a percentage of the total available bandwidth of the port that can be used by the broadcast multicast or unicast traffic e Traffic rate in packets per second at which broadcast multicast or unicast packets are received e Traffic rate in bits
272. ough a Layer 2 switch follow these steps 1 From the Configure menu choose NAT to display the NAT window Q security NAT NAT Instances Add fp Edit jM Delete C show l2nat ins 2 Click Add to display the General tab of the Add Edit NAT Instance window ADD Edit Nat Instance Public to Private Advanced Private to Public Gil 1 Vlans a EE 1 native vlan Private Public Tvpe Range Subnet Mask 2 7 10 10 10 1 20 20 20 1 Single 500 Gil 2 Vlans E 1 native vlan Gateway Translation z Fla E 500 Edit Delete Ge Add Row Public Private No data available nana 4 3 In the Name field type a unique name to identify the instance The instance name cannot include spaces or exceed 32 characters 4 From the list of VLANs on the right check the checkbox next to each VLAN to assign to the instance For more information about VLAN assignments see page 1095 5 In the Private to Public area click Add Row complete the fields and click Save Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 157 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Field Description Private IP Address Type a private IP address e To translate a single address type the existing address for the device on the private subnet To translate a range of addresses type the first address in the range of sequential addresses e Totranslate addresses in a subnet type the exis
273. ower is drawn from the single power connection There is no separate power input for PoE Switch Configuration Required Power Input Power Supplied per Port PoE 44 57V 15 4 W max PoE 50 57V 30 W max Non PoE 9 6 60V Not applicable Power Cables and Cordsets Cordsets 32475 No of Pins Assembly Rating Straight Male 600V 10 A 889N M4AFC F 889N E4AFC F 1 Replace 1 with 6 6 ft 12 12 ft or 20 20 ft for standard cable lengths Patchcords e T HC 32476 No of Assembly StraightFemale Straight Female Right Angle Right Angle Pins Rating Straight Male Right Angle Male Female Straight Female Male Right Angle Male 4 600V 10A 889N F4AFNM 889N F4AFNE 889N R4AFNM 889N R4AFNE 1 Replace 1 with 1 1m 2 2 m 5 5 m and 10 10 m for standard cable lengths Connect the DC power to the switch through the front panel connector Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 Wire External Alarms Some switch models have the following for external alarms e One input alarm relay circuit to sense whether the alarm input is open or closed relative to the alarm input reference pin One output alarm relay circuit with a single Form C single pole double throw relay with one normally open NO and one normally closed NC contact You can configure the output alarm as either normally energized or normally de energized by using
274. page 44 1 Insert a straight through twisted four pair Category Se or better cable with an RJ45 connector into the PoE port PoE Port 2 Insert the other cable end into an RJ45 connector on the other PoE powered device 54 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 Connect to SFP Modules To connect a fiber optic cable to an SFP module follow these steps rubber caps from the fiber optic cable until you are ready to connect the cable The plugs and caps protect the SFP module ports and cables from contamination and ambient light ATTENTION Do not remove the rubber plugs from the SFP module port or the 1 Remove the rubber plugs from the module port and fiber optic cable and store them for future use 2 Insert one end of the fiber optic cable into the SFP module port LC Connector M A 3 Insert the other cable end into a fiber optic receptacle on a target device 4 Observe the port status indicator e The status indicator turns amber while the SFP discovers the network topology and searches for loops This process takes about 30 seconds and then the port status indicator turns green e The status indicator turns green when the switch and the target device have an established link e The status indicator turns off if the target device is not turned on or there is a problem with the cable or the adapter installed
275. panel status indicators can be easily read Access to ports is sufficient for unrestricted cabling Front panel direct current DC power connectors and the alarm relay connector are within reach of the connection to the DC power source e Cabling is away from sources of electrical noise such as radios power lines and fluorescent lighting fixtures e Connect the unit to only an IP67 rated power supply Rockwell Automation offers a Bulletin 1607 IP67 rated power supply to provide 24V DC power to the switch N ATTENTION Do not wire more than 1 conductor on any single terminal 58 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 Install or Remove the SD Card optional The switch supports a Secure Digital SD memory card to store firmware and the startup configuration This storage makes it possible to replace a switch without reconfiguring the replacement switch The SD memory card cover protects the card against shock and vibration by holding the card in place The cover is hinged and secured with captive screws The slot for the SD memory card is located on the side of the switch To install or replace the SD card follow these steps 1 On the side of the switch loosen the captive screws until they are free h 2 Install or remove the card e To i
276. per second at which broadcast multicast or unicast packets are received With each method the port blocks traffic when the rising threshold is reached The port remains blocked until the traffic rate drops below the falling threshold and then resumes normal forwarding In general the higher the level the less effective the protection against broadcast storms IMPORTANT When the port threshold for multicast traffic is reached all multicast traffic except network management traffic such as bridge protocol data unit BDPU and Cisco Discovery Protocol CDP frames are blocked The graph shows broadcast traffic patterns on an interface over a given period of time The example can also be applied to multicast and unicast traffic In this example the broadcast traffic being forwarded exceeded the configured threshold between time intervals T1 and T2 and between T4 and T5 When the amount of specified traffic exceeds the threshold all traffic of that kind is dropped for the next time period Therefore broadcast traffic is blocked during the intervals following T2 and T5 At the next time interval for example T3 if broadcast traffic does not exceed the threshold it is again forwarded Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 95 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Figure 2 Port Thresholds Example forwarded Traffic Blocked Traffic Total Number of Broadcast Packets or Bytes 0 T1 T2 T3 T4
277. put Normally Closed NC connection IN2 Alarm Input 2 REF Alarm Input Reference Ground connection IN1 Alarm Input 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 279 AppendixC Cables and Connectors Cable and Ada pter These sections describe the cables and adapters used with the switches Specifications SFP Module Cable Specifications The following lists the cable specifications for the rugged fiber optic SFP module connections Each port must match the wave length specifications on the other end of the cable and for reliable communication the cable must not exceed the rated maximum cable length Table 48 Fiber optic SFP Module Port Cabling Specifications SFP Module Type Cat No Wavelength nm Fiber Type Core Size Cladding Modal Bandwidth Cable Distance Size micron MHz km 100BASE FX 1783 SFP100FX 1310 MMF 50 125 500 2 km 6562 ft 62 5 125 500 2 km 6562 ft 100BASE LX 1783 SFP100LX 1310 6 6522 10 km 32 810 ft 1000BASE SX 1783 SFP1GSX 850 MMF 62 5 125 160 220 m 722 ft 62 5 125 200 275 m 902 ft 50 125 400 500 m 1640 ft 50 125 500 550 m 1804 ft 1000BASE LX LH 1783 SFP1GLX 1310 G 6522 10 km 32 810 ft 1 Modal bandwidth applies only to multi mode fiber PoE Port Cable Specifications For PoE ports use a Category 5 Cat 5 cable with a distance of up to 100 m 328 ft Ada pter Pinouts The following table lists the pinouts for the console port the RJ45 to DB 9 adapter cable
278. r This is the default mode If the port discovers a connected powered device and the module has enough power it grants power updates the power budget turns on power to the port on a first come first served basis and updates the status indicators If enough power is available for all powered devices connected to the switch power is turned on to all devices If there is not enough available power to accommodate all connected devices and if a device is disconnected and reconnected while other devices are waiting for power it cannot be determined which devices are granted or are denied power If granting power exceeds the system power budget the switch denies power verifies that power to the port is turned off generates a syslog message and updates the status indicators After power has been denied the switch periodically rechecks the power budget and continues to attempt to grant the request for power If a device being powered by the switch is then connected to wall power the switch can continue to power the device The switch can continue to report that it is still powering the device whether the device is being powered by the switch or receiving power from an AC power source If a powered device is removed the switch automatically detects the disconnect and removes power from the port You can connect a nonpowered device without damaging it You can specify the maximum wattage that is allowed on the port If the IEEE class maximu
279. r DC power connections use UL and CSA rated style 1007 or 1569 twisted pair copper appliance wiring material AWM wire N N N WARNING If you connect or disconnect power or alarm wiring while the field side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding ATTENTION This equipment must be grounded Never defeat the ground conductor or operate the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed ground conductor Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available This equipment is intended to be grounded to comply with emission and immunity requirements Make sure that the switch functional ground lug is connected to earth ground during normal use ATTENTION To make sure that the equipment is reliably connected to earth ground follow the grounding procedure instructions and use a suitable ring terminal lug such as Thomas amp Betts part number 10RCR or equivalent 38 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 functional ground screw when connecting the power supply You must provide an acceptable grounding path for each device in your application For more information on proper grounding guidelines refer to publication 1770 4 1 Industrial Automation Wiring and
280. r Layer 3 switch can enforce privileges and restrictions to different user types Refer to Figure 1 on page 91 e VLAN 5 offers employee level access to the company resources This kind of network access requires a direct connection to the specific switch ports e VLAN 7 offers Internet only access to company visitors Visitors with wired or wireless connections to switch ports are assigned to this VLAN which automatically restricts guest access to only the Internet e VLAN 9 which has one or more switch ports connected to the wireless access point enforces security policies to identify the wireless user for example as employee or a guest and to determine what the user can do on the network for example access only the Internet or access other network resources Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 IGMP Snooping with Querier Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Layer 2 switches can use IGMP snooping to constrain the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring Layer 2 interfaces so that multicast traffic is forwarded to only those interfaces associated with IP multicast devices As the name implies IGMP snooping requires the LAN switch to snoop on the IGMP transmissions between the host and the router and to keep track of multicast groups and member ports When the switch receives an IGMP report from a host for a particular multicast group the switch adds the host port number to the forwarding
281. r Web interface 238 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Restart or Reset the Switch Option Restart Reset the Switch to Factory Defaults Description Troubleshoot the Switch Chapter 6 If you cannot solve an issue by reconfiguring a feature either restarting or resetting the switch can solve the issue or help you to eliminate probable causes If the issue exists after you reset the switch to its default settings it is unlikely that the switch is causing the issue This option restarts the switch without turning off power The switch retains its saved configuration settings during the restart process However the Device Manager Web interface is unavailable during the process When the process completes the switch displays the Device Manager Web interface IMPORTANT Restarting the switch interrupts connectivity of your devices to the network This option resets the switch deletes the current configuration settings returns to the factory default settings and then restarts the switch ATTENTION Resetting the switch deletes all customized switch settings including the IP address and returns the switch to the factory default settings The same software image is retained You need to reconfigure the basic switch settings Refer to ArmorStratix 5700 Switch Installation on page 57 ATTENTION Resetting the switch interrupts connectivity of your devices to the network IMPORTANT Restarting or resett
282. r the current multicast traffic has exceeded the threshold value Broadcast Displays a yes or no value indicating whether the current broadcast traffic has exceeded the threshold value Displays the percentage of the bandwidth being used Note whether the percentage of usage is what you expect during the given time of network activity If usage is higher than expected an issue can exist Click to display the Port Diagnostics dialog box for the corresponding port The Port Diagnostics dialog box provides you information to diagnose a network performance issue Click to display the Cable Diagnostics dialog box for the corresponding port The Cable Diagnostics dialog box provides information to diagnose a cable issue Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 207 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Port Diagnostics Use the Port Diagnostics dialog box to view the status of the link performance e View octet and packet counters e View collisions on the link e View errors on the link e Reset and clear all status counters Port Diagnostics Port Falz Imterface Counters Media Counters Orctets Ir 3542326 Alignment Errors Octets Out 1042712672 FCS Errors Ucast Packets ln 42728 Single Collisions Llcast Packets Out 11681 Multiple Collisions NOU cast Packets ln 47816 SLlE Test Errors NU Ucast Packets Out 12128908 Detered Transmissions Discards In Late Collisions
283. r the specific VLAN in the DHCP pool table QO Network DHCP ceu ne DHCP Persistence Enable DHCP vl DHCP Snooping LO Submit DHCP Pool Table Add f Edit W Delete Pool Name Network Network Mask VLAN Reserved Only DHCP Snooping No data available 4 To reserve an address pool to only the devices that are specified in the DHCP persistence table check the Reserved Only checkbox in the DHCP pool table DHCP requests from ports not in the persistence table or from another device switch are ignored By default this option is disabled and the Reserved Only checkbox is cleared 5 Click Submit Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 137 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Configure a DHCP IP Address Pool Once DHCP is enabled you can create the DHCP address pool To configure a DHCP IP address pool follow these steps 1 From the Configure menu choose DHCP 2 Click Add Q Network DHCP Global Settings DHCP Persistence Enable DHCP LJ DHCP Snooping L Submit DHCP Pool Table Edit Delete Pool Name Network Network Mask VLAN Reserved Only DHCP Snooping No data available 3 Complete the fields as described below and click OK DHCP Pool Name DHCP Pool Network D Subnet Mask 455 255 253 0 z Starting 1P edino J s Never Expires O User Defined Days HH MM EES cancel Field Desc
284. rd window is similar to the Monitor gt Trends window The Dashboard window displays the instantaneous status while the Trends window displays the historical status By using them together you can gather the detailed conditions of the switch and its ports For information about the Trends window see page 170 Front Panel and Status Indicators The Front Panel view is a graphical display of the switch front panels Front Panel View Status FAN ALARM ALA A Fl TT IH11Hz OUT ii Mowe the pointer ower the ports for more information The switch components on the front panel view are color coded by status The colors help you to quickly see if a fault or an error condition exists The system level status indicators and port level status indicators shown on the front panel view match those on the physical switch Description EIP Mod The EIP Mod status indicator shows the status of the switch o Solid green Blinking green Blinking red Solid red Blinking green and red O CY gt o DC_B Solid green Solid red Alarm Out Off Solid green Blinking red Power to the switch is off or is not properly connected The switch is operating properly The switch is not configured for example the switch does not have an IP address configured The switch has detected a recoverable system fault The switch has detected a non recoverable system fault The switch is running its power on self
285. redundant connection between any two switches in the segment In the following figure E1 or E2 can be configured as the primary edge port Figure 7 Ring Segment Example REP segments have these characteristics e If all ports in the segment are operational one port referred to as the alternate port is in the blocked state for each VLAN e If VLAN load balancing is configured two ports in the segment control the blocked stace of VLANs e If onc or more ports in a segment is not operational causing a link failure all ports forward traffic on all VLANs to support ongoing connectivity e In case of a link failure the alternate ports are unblocked as quickly as possible When the failed link comes back up a logically blocked port per VLAN is selected with minimal disruption to the network Access Ring Topologies In access ring topologies the neighboring switch cannot support REP as shown in Figure 8 In this case you can configure the non REP facing ports E1 and E2 as edge no neighbor ports These ports inherit all properties of edge ports and you can configure them the same as any edge port including configuring them to send STP or REP topology change notices to the aggregation switch In this case the STP topology change notice TCN that is sent is a multiple spanning tree MST STP message Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 109 Chapter 3 110 Switch Software Features In the fo
286. ress is available only when the switch is online and dimmed when the switch is offline Click to refresh the grid control with new data obtained directly from the switch From the keyboard press Alt R If you have changed a value in the grid and clicked Refresh before clicking Set all values in the grid are returned to their previously set values The Refresh button is available only when the switch is online The Refresh button is dimmed when the switch is offline Click to apply changes on this dialog box to the switch The Enter Password dialog box can appear Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 Time Sync Configuration Use this feature to synchronize the ports through PTP PTP synchronizes with nanosecond accuracy the real time clocks of the devices in a network By using the best master clock selection the switch identifies the switch port that is connected to a device with the best clock source The switch then synchronizes its internal clock with the best clock source and the switch port is set to master state The most precise clock source in the network is referred to as the grandmaster clock For more information about this feature see CIP Sync Time Synchronization Precision Time Protocol on page 100 TIP The information on this tab is not displayed if you are offline Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 213 Chapter
287. ription DHCP Pool Name The name of the DHCP IP address pool configured on the switch The name can have up to 31 alphanumeric characters The name cannot contain a or a tab This field is required A DHCP IP address pool is a range or pool of available IP addresses that the switch can assign to connected devices DHCP Pool Network The subnetwork IP address of the DHCP IP address pool The format is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be from 0 255 This field is required Subnet Mask The network address that identifies the subnetwork subnet of the DHCP IP address pool Subnets segment the devices in a network into smaller groups The default is 255 255 255 0 This field is required Starting IP The starting IP address that defines the range of addresses in the DHCP IP address pool The format is a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be from 0 255 Be sure that none of the IP addresses that you assign are being used by another device in your network This field is required 138 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Field Ending IP Default Router Domain Name DNS Server CIP Instance Lease Length Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Description The ending IP address that defines the range of addresses in the DHCP IP address pool The format is a 32 bit numeric ad
288. ription Stratix Ethernet Managed Switches Technical Data Provides specification information for the switches publication 1783 TD001 Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual Provides information about implementing a system publication ENET RM002 based on the EtherNet IP platform Device Manager Web interface online help provided with Provides context sensitive information on configuring the switch and using the switch including system messages Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell publication 1770 41 Automation industrial system Product Certifications website http www ab com Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details You can view or download publications at http www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative For information on additional software features or further configuration see these Cisco publications at http www Cisco com e Cisco IE 2000 Command Line Reference Manual e Cisco IE 2000 Software Configuration Guide e Cisco IE 2000 Switch System Message Guide Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 13 Preface Notes 14 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Chapter 1 About the Switches Topic Page Switch Catalog Numbe
289. rmally Closed Submit Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Field FCS Hysteresis 1 10 Alarm Name DM Alarms SNMP Trap HW Relay Syslog Thresholds MAX in C Thresholds MIN in C Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Global Alarms To configure global alarms also known as facility alarms from the Configure menu choose Alarm Settings and click the Global tab Alarms Alarm Settings Alarm Relay Setup Globa Port E Submit Alarm Name DM Alarms SNMP Trap HW Relay Syslog Thresholds MAX in C Thresholds MIN in C Dual Power Supply F F F E NA NA Temperature Primary Fi 7 Fi El 95 20 Temperature Secondary Ir E F a License File Corrupt 7 7 Fi NA NA Input Alarm 1 7 F F 7 NA NA Input Alarm 2 EI F Fi NA NA Description The frame check seguence FCS error hysteresis threshold is used to determine when an alarm condition is cleared This value is expressed as a percentage of fluctuation from the FCS bit error rate The default setting is 8 percent You can adjust the percentage to prevent toggling the alarm condition when the FCS bit error rate fluctuates near the configured bit error rate Valid percentages for global settings are 1 10 This setting also can be configured on an individual port by clicking the Port tab These types of alarms can be enabled or disabled e Dual Power Supply The switch monitors DC power supp
290. rnating green and amber There is a fault or error on the link Solid amber The port is disabled EIP Net The EIP Net status indicator shows the network status of the switch Power to the switch is off or is not properly connected Solid green The switch has an established CIP connection to one or more attached devices Blinking green The switch has an IP address but the switch does not have an established connection to one or more attached devices Blinking red One or more connections to attached devices have timed out Solid Red The switch has detected that its IP address is already in use by another device in the network Blinking green and red The switch is running its power on self test POST Status In this mode the port status indicators show the status of the ports This is the default mode No activity on link inka Port has been disabled An error has disabled the port Smartports configuration mismatch on port Port is faulty disabled due to an error or is in an STP blocked state Smartports In this mode each port image shows the applied port role For information about Smartports see Optimize Ports through Smartports Port Roles on page 83 120 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 You can change the port status indicator behavior by choosing a Port mode from the View list on the front panel view Move
291. roa Broadcast T Units Fal 1 04 F Dn 0 Fal 2 F i 95 F Er F a Fal 3 F OV F Oy F ON Fal 4 F OV F Do F ao Fal 5 E OV F O F 54 Fal 6 E F O E 0 Table 11 Port Threshold Fields Field Description Incoming Unicast For each port do the following 1 Check or clear the Enable checkbox Multicast 2 Type the threshold value Pade 3 Choose one of these units one PPS 0 10 billion BPS 0 10 billion 0 100 Outgoing All Traffic For each port do the following 1 Check or clear the Enable checkbox 2 Type the threshold value 3 Click Save 134 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Configure EtherChannels An EcherChannel or port group is a group of two or more switch ports bundled into a single logical link to create a higher bandwidth link between two switches For example four 10 100 switch ports can be assigned to an EtherChannel to provide full duplex bandwidth of up to 800 Mb s If one of the ports in the EtherChannel becomes unavailable traffic is carried over the remaining ports within the EtherChannel All ports in an EtherChannel must have the same characceristics e All are applied with the Smartports IE Switch port role and belong to the same VLAN e All arc either 10 100 ports or all are 10 100 1000 ports You cannot group a mix of 10 100 and 10 1
292. rom which the switch was started You can choose to synchronize the configuration or the software IOS from either the SD card to the onboard memory or from the onboard memory to SD card IMPORTANT You can overwrite your configuration if you synchronize in the wrong direction The Auto Sync tab lets you set up default options for how the Device Manager Web interface prompts the user after a configuration change or IOS update To display this window from the Admin menu choose Sync w File Management Sync Auto Sync v SD Card Status Card Present d Yes Card Status Card File s Not Present Booted From Internal Flash v Sync Status Config File No 10S Image x No v SD to Flash Sync Synchronize Configuration from SD Card to Onboard Flash Synchronize IOS Image from SD Card to Onboard Flash May take up to five minutes SD Card Onboard Flash v Flash to SD Sync Synchronize Configuration from Onboard Flash to SD Card Synchronize IOS Image from Onboard Flash to SD Card May take up to five minutes Onboard Flash SD Card Submit Description Indicates whether SD card is present the card s status and from where its configuration was started Choose from these options e Synchronize configuration from SD card to onboard flash Synchronize IOS image from SD card to onboard flash Choose from these options e Synchronize configuration from onboard flash to SD card lt Synchronize IOS im
293. router You must either change the switch IP address or change the computer or laptop IP address e Ifthe issue persists follow the procedure in the Access Direct Managed Mode section on page 237 and then update the switch network settings on the device manager Express Setup window e Ifthe issue still persists follow the procedure in the Recover the Switch Firmware and Restore Factory Defaults section on page 240 If the Device Manager Web interface does not operate properly for instance the device manager is not responding follow the procedure in the Access Direct Managed Mode section on page 237 and then update the switch network settings on the Device Manager Web interface Express Setup window If the issue persists follow the procedure in the Recover the Switch Firmware and Restore Factory Defaults section on page 240 If you cannot access the device manager remotely from a Web browser follow the procedure in the Access Direct Managed Mode section on page 237 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Performance Issue Speed Duplex and Autonegotiation Autonegotiation and network interface cards NICs Cabling distance Access Direct Managed Mode Troubleshoot the Switch Chapter 6 These are some basic troubleshooting for issues related to switch performance Resolution If the port statistics show a large amount of alignment errors frame check sequence FCS or late collisions erro
294. rs this can indicate a speed or duplex mismatch A common issue with speed and duplex occurs when the duplex settings are mismatched between two switches between a switch and a router or between the switch and a workstation or server This can happen when manually setting the speed and duplex or from autonegotiation issues between the two devices A mismatch occurs under these circumstances e Amanually set speed or duplex parameter is different from the manually set speed or duplex parameter on the connected port e A portis set to autonegotiate and the connected port is set to full duplex with no autonegotiation To maximize switch performance and be sure of a link follow one of these guidelines when changing the settings for duplex and speed e Let both ports autonegotiate both speed and duplex e Manually set the same speed and duplex parameters for the ports on both ends of the connection to the same values e If a remote device does not autonegotiate configure the duplex settings on the two ports to the same values The speed parameter can adjust itself even if the connected port does not autonegotiate Issues sometimes occur between the switch and third party network interface cards NICs By default the switch ports and interfaces are set to autonegotiate It is common for devices like laptops or other devices to be set to autonegotiate as well yet sometimes autonegotiation issues occur To troubleshoot autonegotiation issue
295. rs 16 Switch Software Features 17 Stratix 5700 Switch Dimensions 18 ArmorStratix 5700 Switch Dimensions 21 Switch Front Panel 22 Switch Hardware Features 22 SD Card 23 Switch Memory Allocation 25 Device Manager Web Interface 26 Studio 5000 Environment 27 Cisco Network Assistant 27 Command Line Interface 28 Stratix 5700 Ethernet managed switches provide a secure switching infrastructure for harsh environments You can connect these switches to network devices such as servers routers and other switches In industrial environments you can connect Ethernet enabled industrial communication devices including programmable logic controllers PLCs human machine interfaces HMIs drives sensors and I O Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 15 Chapter 1 Switch Catalog Numbers Catalog Number Stratix 5700 Switches 1783 BMS4S2SGL 1783 BMS4S2SGA 1783 BMSO6SL 1783 BMS06SA 1783 BMSO6TL 1783 BMSO6TA 1783 BMSO06SGL 1783 BMSO6SGA 1783 BMS06TGL 1783 BMS06TGA 1783 BMS10CL 1783 BMS10CA 1783 BMS10CGL 1783 BMS10CGA 1783 BMS10CGN 1783 BMS10CGP 1783 BMS12T4E2CGNK 1783 BMS12T4E2CGP 1783 BMS12T4E2CGL 1783 BMS20CL 1783 BMS20CA 1783 BMS20CGL 1783 BMS20CGN 1783 BMS20CGP 1783 BMS20CGPK ArmorStratix 5700 Switches 1783 ZMS8TA 1783 ZMS16TA 1783 ZMS24TA 1783 ZMS4T4E2TGP 1783 ZMS8T8E2TGP SFP Modules 1783 SFP100FX 1783 SFP1GSX 1783 SFP100LX 1783 SFP1GLX 16 About the Switches These switches are available
296. rt Numbering on Switch Labels Port Numbering in config text File 1783 BMS20CGN 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo Gigabit ports Fa1 1 managed switch full firmware NAT Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Fa1 11 Fa1 12 Fa1 13 Fa1 14 Fa1 15 Fa1 16 Fa1 17 Fa1 18 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 1783 BMS20CGP 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo Gigabit ports Fa1 1 managed switch full firmware PTP Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Fa1 11 Fa1 12 Fa1 13 Fa1 14 Fa1 15 Fa1 16 Fa1 17 Fa1 18 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 81 Chapter3 Switch Software Features Table 3 Port Numbering continued Cat No Port Numbering on Switch Labels Port Numbering in config text File 1783 BMS20CGPK 20 port 16 Ethernet ports 2 SFP slots 2 combo Gigabit ports Fa1 1 managed switch full firmware PTP conformal coating Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fa1 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fa1 7 Fa1 8 Fa1 9 Fa1 10 Fa1 11 Fa1 12 Fa1 13 Fa1 14 Fa1 15 Fa1 16 Fa1 17 Fa1 18 Gi1 1 Gi1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Global Macro Once you complete Express Setup as described on page 57 the switch executes a global macro ab global This macro configures the switch for typical industrial automation applications that use the EtherNet IP protocol This macro sets many parameters including these major settings e Enable IGMP snooping and gu
297. rt and then redetects the powered device The switch repowers the port only if the powered device is a Class 1 Class 2 or a Cisco only powered device To configure PoE ports from the Configure menu choose Power Management o Network Power Management Total Power Llsed 0 0 Watts Total Power Available 65 0 Watts PoE Interface Table Interface Mode Status Power Watts Max Power Watts Override Power Watts Device Class Fal 1 Auto Off 0 0 30 0 N A N A N A Fal 3 Auto Off 0 0 30 0 N A N A N A Fal 5 Auto Off 0 0 30 0 N A N A N A Fal 7 Auto Off 0 0 30 0 N A N A N A Table 15 Power Management Fields Field Description Total Power Supported Total Power Used Total Power Available Interface To limit the total PoE power budget type an appropriate value based on the power source e A 48V power source supports a maximum of 65 W e A 54V power source supports a maximum of 130 W When you save this setting it changes the total PoE power budget and resets the powered devices to meet the new budget IMPORTANT A mismatch between the total power supported and the power supply can cause damage to the switch Take care not to oversubscribe the power supply e Ifyou intend to connect the switch to a power supply that allows more wattage than configured first change the power supply and then specify the total power supported e Ifyou intend to connect the switch to a power supply that allows less wattage than configured first ch
298. s try manually setting both sides of the connection If this does not solve the issue there could be an issue with the firmware or software on your NIC You can resolve this by upgrading the NIC driver to the latest firmware or software available from the manufacturer If the port statistics show excessive FCS late collision or alignment errors verify that the cable distance from the switch to the connected device meets the recommended guidelines You can display the Device Manager Web interface and manage the switch through a physical connection between one of the switch ports and your computer or laptop This type of management connection is referred to as the Direct Managed mode This mode is typically used to connect to the switch by using the Device Manager Web interface when the IP address of the switch is unknown Before you can access Direct Managed mode you must make sure of the following e You must have physical access to the switch e Make sure that at least one switch port is enabled and is not connected to a device Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 237 Chapter6 Troubleshoot the Switch To access the Direct Managed mode follow these steps 1 Press the Express Setup button until the Setup status indicator blinks green and the status indicator of an available switch downlink port blinks green The port with a blinking green status indicator is designated as the Direct Managed mode port Th
299. s 32 58 connecting to 52 66 A adapter pinouts terminal RJ45 to DB 25 281 RJ45 to DB 9 280 address aliasing 93 address translation 101 airflow required clearance 31 58 alarm relay connections connection procedures 50 51 65 alert log 177 allocation memory 57 67 announce interval 147 announce receipt timeout interval 147 ArmorStratix switches catalog number descriptions 16 dimensions 21 installation 57 66 assign VLANs to NAT instance 105 Auto mode PoE 87 auto MDIX 53 273 276 default 133 setting 133 autonegotiation Duplex mode 133 speed 133 troubleshoot 237 Boundary mode 145 timing message settings 146 broadcast storms 95 C cable diagnostics 207 209 cables connect to PoE ports 54 66 crossover four twisted pair pinout 1000BASE T ports 276 identifying 274 using 275 optical 280 SFP module 280 straight through two twisted pair pinout 275 using 274 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Index cabling 10 100 1000 ports 52 66 auto MDIX 53 273 276 CIP data 190 CIP network connections 188 CIP Sync time synchronization 100 clearance 32 58 clock parent 145 synchronization 145 connecting to 10 100 1000 ports 52 66 to DC power 35 40 60 64 to external alarm devices 49 51 65 to SFP modules 55 connection Direct Managed mode 237 properties 195 connectors and cables 10 100 1000 274 275 console 281 dual purpose 276 console port specifications 281 crossover c
300. s default The number can be from 1 1001 Be sure that the switch and your network management station are in the same VLAN Otherwise you lose management connectivity to the switch The management VLAN is the broadcast domain through which management traffic is sent between specific users or devices It provides broadcast control and security for management traffic that must be limited to a specific group of users such as the administrators of your network It also provides secure administrative access to all devices in the network at all times The IP Assignment mode determines whether the switch IP information is manually assigned static or is automatically assigned by a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server The default is Static We recommend that you click Static and manually assign the IP address for the switch You can then use the same IP address whenever you want to access the Device Manager Web interface If you click DHCP the DHCP server automatically assigns an IP address subnet mask and default gateway to the switch As long as the switch is not restarted the switch continues to use the assigned IP information and you are able to use the same IP address to access the Device Manager Web interface If you manually assign the switch IP address and your network uses a DHCP server be sure that the IP address that you give to the switch is not within the range of addresses that the DHCP server automatically assigns to ot
301. s in VLAN load balancing in the REP segment Edge ports are termination points of a REP segment The user must configure two edge ports including one primary edge port for each REP segment Entering edge without primary configures the port as a secondary edge port Primary and secondary edge ports must be configured even if support of VLAN balancing is not required e Transit This port is a non edge port in the REP segment e No Neighbor Primary This port is a primary edge port connected a non REP switch e No Neighbor This port is a secondary edge port connected to a non REP swicch The no neighbor edge ports contain all properties of regular edge ports These ports enable the construction of a REP ring containing a switch that does not support REP protocol e None This port is not part of the REP segment Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 107 Chapter 3 108 Switch Software Features BU REP and STP can coexist on the same switch but not on the same port REP does not interact with STP For example if a port is configured as an REP port STP is disabled on that port STP bridge protocol data units BPDUs are not accepted on or sent from REP ports However adjacent REP and STP rings or domains can share a common link This common link can be used for passing REP and STP date plane traffic or for the STP control plane traffic Figure G shows an example of a segment c
302. s instance Displays the number of ARP and ICMP packets that have been fixed up for this instance Displays the number of incoming packets with untranslated traffic that NAT passed through for this instance Displays the number of outgoing packets with untranslated traffic that NAT blocked for this instance Displays the number of incoming packets with multicast traffic that NAT blocked for this instance Displays the number of outgoing packets of multicast traffic that NAT passed through for this instance Displays the number of incoming packets with IGMP traffic that NAT blocked for this instance Displays the number of outgoing packets with IGMP traffic that NAT blocked for this instance Click to view private to public translation diagnostics for the instance See Private to Public Translation Diagnostics on page 231 Click to view private to public translation diagnostics for the instance See Public to Private Translation Diagnostics on page 232 Click to refresh all diagnostics for this instance Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 Private to Public Translation Diagnostics From the Private to Public Translations dialog box for an instance you can view a list of IP addresses that have been changed by NAT within the last 90 seconds Table1 Private To Public Translations Active Translations in last 90 Seconds 126 7 0 5 192 7 0 3 1
303. s the total number of translations that occurred within the last 90 seconds across all NAT instances Displays the total number of translations across all NAT instances Displays the total number of translated packets across all NAT instances Displays the total number of packets that have been bypassed across all NAT instances Click to refresh all data on the tab Click to delete a NAT instance from the switch after clicking the Trash icon next to the instance Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 215 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment To configure NAT follow one of these procedures based on your application e Create NAT Instances for Traffic Routed through a Layer 3 Switch or Router For an example of this application see Figure 4 on page 102 e Create NAT Instances for Traffic Routed through a Layer 2 Switch For an example of this application see Figure 5 on page 103 IMPORTANT Setupall Smartport roles and VLANs before creating NAT instances If you change a Smartport role or the native VLAN for a port associated with a NAT instance you must reassign VLANs to the NAT instance IMPORTANT Asa result of Layer 2 forwarding current traffic sessions remain established until manually disconnected If you change an existing translation you must manually disconnect all associated traffic sessions before the new translation can take effect Create NAT Instances for Traffic Route
304. se ATTENTION This equipment is supplied as open type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by using a tool The enclosure must meet IP 54 or NEMA type 4 minimum enclosure rating standards ATTENTION To prevent the switch from overheating make sure these minimum clearances e Top and bottom 50 8 mm 2 0 in e Exposed side not connected to the module 50 8 mm 2 0 in e Front 50 8 mm 2 0 in ATTENTION The console ports are intended for temporary local programming purposes only and not intended for permanent connection The console port cables are not to exceed 3 0 m 9 84 ft and must not contain hubs Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 ATTENTION Under certain conditions viewing the optical port may expose the eye to hazard When viewed under some conditions the optical port may expose the eye beyond the maximum permissible exposure recommendations ATTENTION Class 1 laser product Laser radiation is present when the system is open and interlocks bypassed Only trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to install replace or service this equipment ATTENTION This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground Use
305. ssword before any switch parameters can be written The password is the same one you enter during Express Setup Description Explicit messaging connections provide generic multi purpose communication paths between two devices These connections are often referred to as messaging connections Explicit messages provide request response oriented network communication Each request is typically directed at a different data item Explicit messages can be used for configuring monitoring and troubleshooting the switch The Explicit Messaging interface is used by the Logix Designer application I O connections provide dedicated special purpose communication paths between a producing application and one or more consuming applications The application specific 1 0 data that moves through these connections is typically a fixed cyclical structure The switch supports two 1 0 connection choices e Input Only lt Exclusive Owner Both connections are cyclic and adjustable from 300 5000 ms The Input Only connection contains a data structure with status information on the switch in general and specific status on each of the ports This connection is multicast and can be shared by multiple controllers connection originators The Exclusive Owner connection uses the same Input data structure as the Input Only connection but adds an Output data structure The Output data contains a bit for each port that lets you enable or disable each port separately
306. stricted cabling Front panel direct current DC power connectors and the alarm relay connector are within reach of the connection to the DC power source Cabling is away from sources of electrical noise such as radios power lines and fluorescent lighting fixtures Connect the unit to only a Class 2 DC power source N ATTENTION Do not wire more than 1 conductor on any single terminal Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 Install or Remove the SD Card optional WARNING When you insert or remove the CompactFlash SD memory card while power is on an electrical arc can occur This can cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding To install or replace the SD card follow these steps 1 On the front of the switch locate the door that protects the SD card slot 2 Loosen the captive thumb screw at the top of the door by using a screwdriver to open the door 3 Install or remove the card e To install the card slide it into the slot and press it firmly in place until it latches in the spring loaded mechanism The card is keyed so that you cannot fully insert it the wrong way 32271 M Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 33 Chapter 2 34 Switch Installation e To remove the card push it in and let it pop out via the spring loaded m
307. sume more than 15 4 W of power because values from 15 400 30 000 mW are allocated based on only CDP or LLDP requests If a powered device consumes more than 15 4 W without CDP or LLDP negotiation the device can be in violation of the maximum current limitation and can experience a fault for drawing more current than the maximum The port remains in the fault state for a time before attempting to power on again If the port continuously draws more than 15 4 W the cycle repeats Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Software Features Chapter 3 Power Consumption Values You can configure the initial power allocation and the maximum power allocation on a port However these values are only the configured values that determine when the switch turns on or turns off power on the PoE port The maximum power allocation is not the same as the actual power consumption of the powered device When you manually set the maximum power allocation you must consider the power loss over the cable from the port to the powered device The cutoff power is the sum of the rated power consumption of the powered device and the worst case power loss over the cable The actual amount of power consumed by a powered device on a PoE port is the cutoff power value plus a calibration factor of 500 mW 0 5 W The actual cutoff value is approximate and varies from the configured value by a percentage of the configured value For example if the
308. tGi1_ 1Threshold PortGi1_ 2Threshold AllPortsUtilization PortFa1_ 1Utilization PortFa1_ 2Utilization PortFa1_ 3Utilization PortFa1_ 4Utilization PortFa1_ 5Utilization PortFa1_ 6Utilization PortFa1_ 7Utilization PortFa1_ 8Utilization PortFa1_ 9Utilization PortFa1_ 10Utilization Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 UnauthorizedDevice 10 UnauthorizedDevice 11 UnauthorizedDevice 12 UnauthorizedDevice 13 UnauthorizedDevice 14 UnauthorizedDevice 15 UnauthorizedDevice 16 UnauthorizedDevice 19 UnauthorizedDevice 20 ThresholdExceeded 0 ThresholdExceeded 1 ThresholdExceeded 2 ThresholdExceeded 3 ThresholdExceeded 4 ThresholdExceeded 5 ThresholdExceeded 6 ThresholdExceeded 7 ThresholdExceeded 8 ThresholdExceeded 9 ThresholdExceeded 10 ThresholdExceeded 11 ThresholdExceeded 12 ThresholdExceeded 13 ThresholdExceeded 14 ThresholdExceeded 15 ThresholdExceeded 16 ThresholdExceeded 19 ThresholdExceeded 20 Module defined Data Types Appendix A AB STRATIX_5700_18PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name Default Display Valid Values Style PortFa1_ 11Utilization PortFa1_ 12Utilization PortFa1_ 13Utilization PortFa1_ 14Utilization PortFa1_ 15Utilization PortFa1_ 16Utilization PortGi1_1Utilization PortGi1_2Utilization MajorAlarmRelay AlarmRelay 0 MulticastGroupsActive Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 259 Appendix A Module defined Output Data Type 18 port Gb switches 260 Mo
309. table entry when it receives an IGMP Leave Group message from a host it removes the host port from the table entry It also periodically deletes entries if it does not receive IGMP membership reports from the multicast clients The multicast router sends out periodic general queries to all VLANs All hosts interested in this multicast traffic send join requests and are added to the forwarding table entry The switch creates one entry per VLAN in the IGMP snooping IP multicast forwarding table for each group from which it receives an IGMP join request The switch supports IP multicast group based bridging rather than MAC addressed based groups With multicast MAC address based groups if an IP address being configured translates aliases to a previously configured MAC address or to any reserved multicast MAC addresses in the range 224 0 0 xxx the command fails Because the switch uses IP multicast groups there are no address aliasing issues 256 is the default number of multicast groups supported in the switches If you exceed 180 multicast groups we recommend that you switch to the routing SDM template by using the CLI The IP multicast groups learned through IGMP snooping are dynamic If you specify group membership for a multicast group address statically your setting supersedes any automatic manipulation by IGMP snooping Multicast group membership lists can consist of both user defined and IGMP snooping learned settings Multic
310. tart menu choose Programs gt Rockwell Software gt RSLinx gt Tools gt EDS Hardware Installation Tool 2 Click Add to launch the EDS Wizard and add the selected hardware description and associated files Data Accessible With CIP The CIP interface lets you access the following information e Input data via I O connection Link status per port not connected connected Unauthorized device per port OK not OK Unicast threshold exceeded per port OK exceeded Multicast threshold exceeded on each port OK exceeded Broadcast threshold exceeded on each port OK exceeded Port bandwidth utilization per port value in Alarm relay major OK tripped Multicast groups active quantity e Output data via I O connection Port disable per port enabled disabled e Other status data Switch internal temperature degrees Centigrade Power supply A present yes no Power supply B present yes no Identity information vendor ID device type product code product name revision serial number IOS release version Switch uptime since last restart Management CPU utilization in percentage CIP connection counters open close requests open close rejects timeouts Port alarm status per port OK not forwarding not operating excessive FCS errors Port fault status per port Error Disable SFP error native VLAN mismatch MAC address flap condition security violation Port d
311. tch reads the on board boot parameters and restarts from the specified IOS image on the onboard flash memory You must use the SD card available from Rockwell Automation catalog number 1784 SD1 with the switch ATTENTION Rockwell Automation reserves the right to withhold support if a non Rockwell SD card is used in this product 23 Chapter1 About the Switches If you start from the SD card and then remove it while the switch is running the following conditions apply e The Device Manager Web interface is no longer be accessible e Changes made by using the CLI or the AOP take effect but are not saved when the switch is restarted e Ifthe SD card is reinserted into the slot changes are not saved to the card unless new changes are made Then the entire configuration is saved to the card switch is engaged the switch starts from the SD card successfully Changes made by using the CLI AOP or Device Manager Web interface take effect but are not saved when the switch is restarted ATTENTION SD cards commonly have a physical read only lock switch If this SD Card Sync You can use the Device Manager Web interface or the AOP for the Logix Designer application to synchronize the SD card for configuration and IOS updates The configuration synchronization process synchronizes config text and vlan dat from the chosen source to the chosen destination The IOS image synchronization process synchronizes the existing boot
312. te if you are using IP v6 You can select SDM templates for IP version 4 IP v4 to optimize these features Feature Memory Allocation Default Routing Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Unicast MAC addresses 7 5K IPv4 IGMP groups multicast routes 0 25 K IPv4 unicast routes 0 48K 0 IPv6 multicast groups amp CH 0375K Directly connected IPv4 hosts 0 AK Directly connected IPv6 addresses 9 OD 0 Indirect IPv4 routes o 03K Indirect IPv6 routes on 0 IPv4 policy based routing aces 9 Oe IPv4 MAC QoS aces 0 375 K IPv4 MAC security aces 0 375 K IPv6 policy based routing aces 9 Oe 0 IPv6 security aces Of 0 125 K Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 25 Chapter1 About the Switches Device Manager Web Interface 26 You can manage the switch by using the Device Manager Web interface to configure and monitor the switch The Device Manager Web interface is a graphical device management tool for configuring monitoring and troubleshooting individual switches The Device Manager Web interface displays real time views of switch configuration and performance It simplifies configuration tasks with features such as Smartports to quickly set up the switch and its ports It uses graphical color coded displays such as the Front Panel view graphs and animated indicators to simplify monitoring tasks It provides alert tools to help you to identify and to solve networking problems You can display the Device Manager Web interface
313. te subnet that are configured for translation If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid Displays the range of unique public addresses to represent the devices If blank verify that the values in the fields above are valid Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 219 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment 6 Click OK 7 Complete the Gateway Translation fields to enable devices on the public subnet to communicate with devices on the private subnet e Public Type the default gateway address of the Layer 3 switch or router connected to the switch s uplink port e Private Type a unique IP address to represent the Layer 3 switch or router on the private network 8 To configure traffic permits and packet fixups proceed to Configure Traffic Permits and Fixups on page 228 9 Click Set Create NAT Instances for Traffic Routed through a Layer 2 Switch To create a NAT instance for traffic routed through a Layer 2 switch follow these steps 1 From the NAT tab click New Instance to display the NAT Instance dialog box NAT Instance Instance QZZ X 4 General Public to Private Advanced Name Instancel Private to Public NAT Table Provide Private subnet devices unique IP addresses on the Public subnet E Delete m2m810 100030 W 42008105 100015 M P 192168132 100032 255255255224 M
314. tem restarted Mar 30 01 27 58 errors SoLINK 3 UPDOWN Interface FastEthernet1 1 changed state to up Mar 30 01 28 01 informational oUSB_CONSOLE 6 MEDIA_RJ45 Console media type is R45 Mar 30 01 28 01 notifications 9GLINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Vian500 changed state to up Mar 30 01 28 02 notifications SoLINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface FastEthernet1 1 changed state to up Mar 30 01 28 02 debugging CDP EV RCVD CDP packet on FastEthernet1 1 with len 1 Mar 30 01 28 02 debugging CDP Packet Process DONE Jan 29 15 12 05 informational 5Y5 6 CLOCKUPDATE System clock has been updated from 01 28 30 UTC Wed Mar 30 2011 to 15 12 05 UTC W Jan 31 20 30 29 notifications SoLINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Vlan500 changed state to down Jan 31 20 20 31 notifications SoLINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Vian500 changed state to up To filter historical events choose a severity filter or type filter e Debugging Debug messages e Informational Informational messages e Notifications The switch is operating normally but has a significant condition e Warnings The switch has a warning condition e Errors The switch has an error condition e Critical The switch has a critical condition e Alerts The switch requires immediate action e Emergencies The switch is unusable Click Clear Log to acknowledge that you have read the alerts Clicking Clear Log does not resolve the
315. ter the appropriate subnet mask for the switch The subnet mask is a 32 bit number Set each octet between 0 255 The default is 255 255 255 0 A gateway is a router or other network device through which the switch communicates with devices on other networks or subnetworks The gateway IP address must be part of the same subnet as the switch IP address The switch IP address and the default gateway IP address cannot be the same IMPORTANT Communication is disrupted when you change the gateway IP address Enter the IP address of the primary Domain Name Server DNS Set each octet between 0 255 The first octet cannot be 127 or a number greater than 223 Enter the IP address of the secondary Domain Name Server DNS Set each octet between 0 255 The first octet cannot be 127 or a number greater than 223 Enter the name of the domain in which the module resides The domain name consists of a sequence of name labels separated by periods such as example com The domain name has a 48 character limit and is restricted to ASCII letters a z digits 0 9 and periods and hyphens Optional Enter a name to help identify the switch when monitoring or troubleshooting a problem The name can be up to 64 characters and can include alphanumeric and special characters comma and dash Optional Enter contact information for the switch up to 200 characters The contact information can include alphanumeric and special characters dash and co
316. test POST Power to the switch is off or is not properly connected Power is present on the associated circuit Power is not present on the associated circuit and the switch is configured for dual input power Alarm Out not configured or the switch is off Alarm Out is configured no alarm is detected The switch has detected a major alarm Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 119 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Table 9 Front Panel Status Indicators continued Indicator Description Alarm In 1 Off Alarm input not configured Alim In 2 Solid green Alarm input configured no alarm detected Blinking red Major alarm detected Solid red Minor alarm detected Setup Off The switch is configured as a managed switch Solid green The switch is in initial setup Blinking green The switch is in initial setup fault recovery or initial setup is incomplete Solid red The switch failed to start initial setup or recovery because there is no available switch port to connect to the management station Disconnect a device from a switch port then press the Express Setup button on the switch Ports Each combo port has two status indicators one for the SFP module and one for the RJ45 connector The appropriate status indicator is active for the active port No link present on the port Solid green Port link no activity Flashing green and off Link is active and healthy Alte
317. the Switch Power Connectors 43 Wire the Power over Ethernet DC Power Source 44 Attach the PoE Power Connector 46 Install an SFP Module optional 46 Remove SFP Modules from SFP Module Slots 48 Wire the External Alarms 49 Attach the Alarm Relay Connector to the Switch 52 Connect to 10 100 and 10 100 1000 Ports 52 Connect to 10BASE T 100BASE TX or 1000BASE T Ports 53 Connect to PoE Ports 54 Connect to SFP Modules 55 Connect to a Dual purpose Port 56 ArmorStratix 5700 Switch Installation 57 Installation Guidelines 57 Install or Remove the SD Card optional 59 Verify Switch Operation 60 Mount the Switch 61 Ground the Switch 62 Connect the Switch to a DC Power Source 64 Wire External Alarms 65 Connect to 10 100 and 10 100 1000 Ports 66 Connect to PoE Ports 66 Set Up the Switch Initially with Express Setup 67 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 29 Chapter 2 Switch Installation Stratix 5700 Switch Installation A ATTENTION Environment and Enclosure This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in overvoltage Category ll applications as defined in IEC 60664 1 at altitudes up to 2000 m 6562 ft without derating This eguipment is not intended for use in residential environments and may not provide adeguate protection to radio communication services in such environments This equipment is supplied as open type equipment It must be mounted within an enclosure that is
318. the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Module Information You can monitor and reset the switch from the Module Info tab General Connection Module Info Fault Pragram Action Switch Configuration Switch Status Port Configuration Smartports amp VLANs Port Thresholds Port Security P S Identification Status Vendor Allen Bradley Major Fault Hone Product Type Communications Adapter Minor Fault Hone Product Code 1783 BMS1700G4 Configured Non Default Configuration Revision 1 001 Dwned Ho Serial Number 080044 00 Module Identity Match Product Name 1783 BNMSTULGA Stratis 5700 Managed Switch Reset Module Status Running Table 29 Module Info Tab Fields Field Description Identification Displays the following information about the switch e Vendor e Product type e Product code e Revision lt Serial number e Product name Status Displays the status of the following e Major minor fault status None Recoverable Non recoverable e Configuration Non default configuration Default configuration e Owned Indicates whether there is an 1 0 connection Yes No e Module identity Match Agrees with what is specified on the General tab In order for the Match condition to exist the vendor product type product code and major revision must agree Mismatch Does not agree with what is specified on the General tab The Module Identify field does not take in
319. the pointer over a port to display specific information about the port and its status TIP If you move the pointer over a port that is blinking green and amber the status is one of the following Link is faulty e Link has collisions In either state the port is receiving and sending traffic Note the following e The speed and Duplex mode for a port appear only when a device is connected to the port e For dual purpose ports the Type field displays 10 100 1000BaseTX for the copper uplink port whether or not the port is active The Type field also displays either the type of SFP module installed or Empty if a module is not installed e The Smartport type and VLAN type and name are displayed when Smartport Port mode is selected e The Uptime field shows how long the switch has been operating since it was last powered on or was restarted Status is automatically refreshed every 60 seconds or when you click Refresh The refresh counter shows the number of seconds that remain before the next refresh cycle starts Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 121 Chapter4 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Switch Information The Switch Information area on the Dashboard displays information about the switch as described in the following table 122 Field Description Host Name A descriptive name for this switch The default name is Switch You can set this parameter on the Admin gt Express
320. the switch Refer to SNMP on page 111 for more information The switch software monitors conditions on a per port or a global basis If the conditions do not match the set parameters an alarm or a system message is triggered By default the switch sends the system messages to a logging facility You can configure the switch to send SNMP traps to an SNMP server You also can configure the switch to trigger an external alarm device by using the two independent alarm relays Alarm Relay Settings You can configure the switch to trigger an external alarm device The switch supports two alarm inputs and one alarm output The switch software is configured to detect faults which are used to energize the relay coil and change the state on both of the relay contacts Normally open contacts close and normally closed contacts open To configure alarm relay settings from the Configure menu choose Alarm Settings On the Alarm Relay Setup tab click one of these options for each type of alarm relay e Normally Opened The normal condition is that no current flows through the contact The alarm is generated when current flows e Normally Closed The normal condition has current flowing through the contact The alarm is generated when the current stops flowing y Alarms Alarm Settings Global Port Output Relay Normally Opened Normally Closed Input Relay1 O Normally Opened Normally Closed Input Relay J Normally Opened No
321. the traffic of only one VLAN unless it is configured as a voice VLAN port e Trunk tThe interface is in permanent trunking mode and negotiates to convert the neighboring link into a trunk link even if the neighboring interface is not a trunk interface If you choose this option also choose whether to allow All VLANs or specified VLAN IDs e Dynamic Auto The interface converts the link to a trunk link if the neighboring interface is set to trunk or desirable mode This mode is the default setting If you choose this option specify an Access VLAN to use when the link is in access mode Also specify whether to allow All VLANs or specified VLAN IDs when the link is in trunk mode e Dynamic Desirable The interface converts the link to a trunk link if the neighboring interface is set to Trunk Dynamic Desirable or Auto mode If you choose this option specify an Access VLAN to use when the link is in access mode Also choose whether to allow All VLANs or specified VLAN IDs when the link is in Trunk mode Co nfigure Port Thresholds Configure port thresholds to prevent traffic on a LAN from being disrupted by a broadcast multicast or unicast storm on one of the physical interfaces To configure port thresholds from the Configure menu choose Port Thresholds o Network Port Thresholds SaaS Outgoing Fort Name Enable Unic Unicast Thre Units Enable Multi Multicast Th Units Enable B
322. this role to ports to be connected to other switches Port is set to Trunk mode Portfast enabled e Router for Automation Apply this role to routers or ports to be connected to Layer 3 switches with routing services enabled e Phone for Automation Apply this role to ports to be connected to IP phones A desktop device such as a computer can be connected to the IP phone Both the IP phone and the connected computer have network access through the port This role prioritizes voice traffic over general data traffic to provide clear voice reception on the IP phones Port is set to Trunk mode Port security supports three MAC IDs to this port e Wireless For Automation Apply this role to ports to be connected to wireless access points The access point can provide network access to up to 30 mobile wireless users e Port Mirroring Apply this role to ports to be monitored by a network analyzer For more information about port mirroring see Port Mirroring on page 113 e None Apply this role to ports if you do not want a specialized Smartport role on the port This role can be used on connections to any device including devices in the roles described above e Custom Create these roles for your application You can set the type of VLAN you implement if any Enter the name for the macro Macro names are case sensitive The string can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters The string cannot contain a a space or a t
323. ting starting address for a device on the private subnet This address must correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Subnet Mask Starting Private Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 0 or 192 168 1 128 255 255 255 192 The last octet must in one of the following 0 64 128 192 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 64 255 255 255 224 The last octet must in one of the following 0 32 64 96 128 160 192 224 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 32 255 255 255 240 The last octet must in one of the following 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 EXAMPLE 192 168 1 16 Public IP Address Type a public IP address e Jo translate a single address type a unique public address to represent the device e To translate a range of addresses type the first address in the range of sequential addresses e To translate addresses in a subnet type a unique starting public address to represent the devices This address must correspond to the size of the subnet mask to translate as shown below Subnet Mask Starting Public Subnet Address 255 255 0 0 The last two octets must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 0 0 255 255 255 0 The last octet must end in 0 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 0 255 255 255 128 The last octet must end in 0 or 128 EXAMPLE 10 200 1 0
324. to account the Electronic Keying or Minor Revision selections for the switch that were specified on the General tab Refresh Click to refresh the tab with new data from the module Reset Module Click to perform a switch reset power cycle with the current configuration file The Password Confirmation dialog box can appear ATTENTION Resetting a module causes all connections to or through the module to be closed This can result in loss of control 196 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Chapter 5 Switch Configuration You can configure IP settings and administrative parameters from the Switch Properties Configuration tab You must be online to perform these configurations In p Offline mode nothing is displayed on this tab The IP address can be manually assigned static or it can be automatically assigned by a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server The default is Static We recommend that you choose Static and manually assign the IP address for the switch You can then use the same IP address whenever you want to access the switch e Static Manually enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway e DHCP The switch automatically obtains an IP address default gateway and subnet mask from the DHCP server As long as the switch is not restarted it continues to use the assigned IP information General Connection Module Into Switch Configur
325. tomation about us sustainability ethics product environmental compliance page Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A S Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 Icerenk y Istanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headguarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Supersedes Publication 1783 UM004D EN P March 2014 Copyright 2014 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
326. tomation com services online phone Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support overview page or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellau
327. un the Power on Self Test POST by using the IOS CLI See the appropriate documentation at http www Cisco com for more information 3 After successfully running this test do the following a Turn off power to the switch b Disconnect the cables c Decide where you want to install the switch Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 35 Chapter2 Switch Installation Mount the Switch on a DIN Rail The switch ships with a spring loaded latch on the rear panel for mounting on a DIN rail A gt 36 WARNING If you connect or disconnect console port cables with power applied to this module or any device on the network an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding WARNING Do not use the USB mini console port in hazardous locations ATTENTION Prevent Electrostatic Discharge This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment e Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static e Wear an approved grounding wriststrap e Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards e Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment e Use a static safe workstation if available e Store the equipment in appropriate static safe packaging when not in u
328. unning configuration Reset the switch to factory defaults and then restart the switch Description Ensures that any changes in the running configuration are saved before the switch restarts Restarts the switch with its previously saved configuration settings Resets the device to the factory default settings deleting the current configuration settings and then restarts the device You will lose connectivity with the device and need to initiate Express Setup to reconfigure the device Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Upgrade the Switch Firmware Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 You must have access to the Internet to download switch firmware from http www rockwellautomation com to your computer or network drive To update the switch with the latest software changes and features from the Admin menu choose Software Update From the Device Manager Web interface you can upgrade your switches one at a time With firmware revision 2 001 or later the firmware upgrade is installed to the running nonvolatile memory location e Ifyou start the switch with the SD card inserted the upgrade is installed on the SD card e Ifyou start the switch from onboard memory without the SD card inserted the upgrade is installed in the onboard flash memory IMPORTANT Wait for the upgrade process to complete Do not use or close the browser session with the Device Manager
329. uthorizedDevice 18 PortGi1_ 1UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 19 PortGi1_ 2UnauthorizedDevice UnauthorizedDevice 20 AnyPortThreshold ThresholdExceeded 0 PortFa1_ 1Threshold ThresholdExceeded 1 PortFa1_ 2Threshold ThresholdExceeded 2 PortFa1_ 3Threshold ThresholdExceeded 3 PortFa1_ 4Threshold ThresholdExceeded 4 PortFa1_5Threshold ThresholdExceeded 5 PortFa1_6Threshold ThresholdExceeded 6 PortFa1_ 7Threshold ThresholdExceeded 7 PortFa1_ 8Threshold ThresholdExceeded 8 PortFa1_ 9Threshold ThresholdExceeded 9 PortFa1_ 10Threshold ThresholdExceeded 10 PortFa1_11Threshold ThresholdExceeded 11 PortFa1_ 12Threshold ThresholdExceeded 12 PortFa1_ 13Threshold ThresholdExceeded 13 PortFa1_ 14Threshold ThresholdExceeded 14 PortFa1_15Threshold ThresholdExceeded 15 PortFa1_16Threshold ThresholdExceeded 16 PortFa1_ 17Threshold ThresholdExceeded 17 PortFa1_ 18Threshold ThresholdExceeded 18 PortGi1_ 1Threshold ThresholdExceeded 19 PortGi1_ 2Threshold ThresholdExceeded 20 AllPortsUtilization PortFa1_ 1Utilization PortFa1_2Utilization PortFa1_3Utilization PortFa1_4Utilization PortFa1_5Utilization PortFa1_6Utilization PortFa1_7Utilization PortFa1_ 8Utilization PortFa1_9Utilization PortFa1_ 10Utilization PortFa1_ 11Utilization PortFa1_ 12Utilization Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Module defined Output Data Type 20 port Gb switches Module defined Data Types AB STRATIX_5700_20PORT_GB_MANAGED 1 0 Member Name
330. vailable only if you choose Range in the Type field Valid values 1 128 Default value 1 IMPORTANT Each address in the range counts as one translation entry The switch supports a maximum of 128 translation entries Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for the addresses to translate Valid values e Class B 255 255 0 0 e Class C 255 255 255 0 e Portion of Class C 255 255 255 128 255 255 255 192 255 255 255 224 255 255 255 240 provides 128 addresses per translation entry provides 64 addresses per translation entry provides 32 addresses per translation entry provides 16 addresses per translation entry DDO non 6 In the Gateway Translation area click Add Row complete the fields and click Save The gateway translation enables devices on the public subnet to communicate with devices on the private subnet Field Description Public Type the default gateway address of the Layer 3 switch or router connected to the switch s uplink port Private Type a unique IP address to represent the Layer 3 switch or router on the private network 7 Optional To configure traffic permits and packet fixups proceed to Configure Traffic Permits and Fixups on page 161 8 Click Submit 156 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Manage the Switch via the Device Manager Web Interface Chapter 4 Create NAT Instances for Traffic Routed through a Layer 2 Switch To create a NAT instance for traffic routed thr
331. witch Installation Attach the Alarm Relay Connector to the Switch To attach the alarm relay connector to the front panel of the switch follow these steps 1 Insert the alarm relay connector into the receptacle on the switch front panel 2 Use a ratcheting torque flathead screwdriver to tighten the captive screws on the sides of the alarm relay connector Alarm Relay Connector Upper Captive Screw 32290 M Connect to 10 100 and 10 100 1000 Ports The switch 10 100 1000 ports automatically configure themselves to operate at the speed of attached devices If the attached ports do not support autonegotiation you can explicitly set the speed and duplex parameters Connecting devices that do not autonegotiate or that have their speed and duplex parameters manually set can reduce performance or result in no linkage The Auto MDIX feature is enabled by default Unless this feature is disabled you can use either straight through or crossover cables to connect to other devices on the network To maximize performance choose one of these methods for configuring the Ethernet ports e Let the ports autonegotiate both speed and duplex e Set the port speed and duplex parameters on both ends of the connection 52 Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 Connect to 10BASE T 100BASE TX or 1000BASE T Ports To connect to 1I0BASE T 100BASE TX or 1000BASE T ports follow th
332. witch from internal memory even if you insert an SD card while starting the system changes are saved to internal memory To determine the start method click the SD Sync tab from the Device Manager Web interface The configuration files config text amp vlan dat are in human readable ASCII format You can download the files to a computer by using one of these methods e FIP e AOP e By using a computer to read the SD card You can also store the configuration files as part of your controller project in the Logix Designer application The Device Manager Web interface lets you synchronize your IOS image and configuration files automatically or on demand The SD card synchronization feature lets you synchronize the SD card with the onboard flash memory You can synchronize either the configuration files or the IOS image If the SD card is present the switch starts from the SD card with its configuration If the SD card is not present the switch reads the start parameters from the specified IOS image stored on internal memory IMPORTANT You can overwrite your desired configuration if you synchronize in the wrong direction You can connect up to two alarm inputs from external devices in your environment such as a door or a temperature gauge to the alarm input port on the switch front panel Output alarm contacts can be configured by using the CLI The default output is also triggered by an over or under temperature alarm or a port n
333. wser then automatically redirects to the Express Setup web page e Verify that any proxy settings or pop up blockers are disabled on your browser e Verify that any wireless interface is disabled on the computer Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 Switch Installation Chapter 2 9 Complete the fields To view fields for Common Industrial Protocol CIP you must click Advanced Settings Network Settings Host Name Management Interface VLAN IP Assignment Mode Static DHCP P Address Default Gateway l User Password H Confirm Password Advanced Settings CIP WLAN 1 IP Address Same As Management VLAN Telnet CIP and Enable Password leave it blank if no change Same As Admin Password Confirm Password Submit Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 71 Chapter2 Switch Installation Field Host Name Management Interface VLAN ID IP Assignment Mode IP Address Default Gateway optional NTP Server User Password Confirm Password CIP VLAN IP Address Same As Management VLAN Telnet CIP and Enable Password optional Confirm Password Same As Admin Password 72 Description Network Settings The name of the device The name and ID of the management VLAN through which the switch is managed Choose an existing VLAN to be the management VLAN The default ID is 1 The default name for the management VLAN i
334. ystem Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 199 Chapter5 Manage the Switch via the Studio 5000 Environment Port Configuration Port configuration settings determine how data is received and sent between the Field Port Enable Auto negotiate Speed Duplex 200 switch and the attached device You must be online to configure the port features Most of the information on this tab is not displayed if you are offline General Connection Module Info Fault Program Action Switch Configuration Switch Status Port Configuration 5martports amp VLANs Port Thresholds Port Security PL Port E Gill Gil 2 Fai Fa1 2 Fa1 3 Fal 4 Fa1 5 Fa1 6 Fai Fala ad EREA lt lt EA lt lt lt lt lt ET le Auto Negotiate Speed Duplex 100 Mbps e Full Half mel Half me 100 Mbps e Full Half mel Half mel Half el Half Half Half Table 32 Port Configuration Tab Fields Description The port selected for configuration The port number includes the port type Fa for Fast Ethernet and Gi for Gigabit Ethernet and the specific port number EXAMPLE Gi1 1 is Gigabit Ethernet port 1 Check the checkbox to enable the port Clear the checkbox to manually disable shut down the port We recommend that you disable the port if the port is not in use and is not attached to a device You can troubleshoot a suspected unauthorized c
335. zinc plated yellow chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding The use of other DIN rail materials for example aluminum or plastic that can corrode oxidize or are poor conductors can result in improper or intermittent grounding Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately every 200 mm 7 8 in and use end anchors appropriately gt gt To attach the switch to a DIN rail follow these steps 1 Position the rear panel of the switch directly in front of the DIN rail making sure that the DIN rail fits in the space between the two hooks near the top of the switch and the spring loaded latch near the bottom 2 Holding the bottom of the switch away from the DIN rail place the two hooks on the back of the switch over the top of the DIN rail 32285 M 3 Push the switch toward the DIN rail to cause the spring loaded latch at the bottom rear of the switch to move down and snap into place Rockwell Automation Publication 1783 UM004E EN P June 2014 37 Chapter2 Switch Installation Remove the Switch from the DIN Rail To remove the switch from a DIN rail or a rack follow these steps 1 Remove power from the switch and disconnect all cables and connectors from the front panel of the switch 2 Insert a tool such as a flat head screwdriver in the slot at the bottom of the spring loaded latch and use it to release the latch from the DIN rail 32286 M Ground the Switch Fo

Stratix 5700 Ethernet Managed Switches User Manual, 1783

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents